Toyota RAV4, RAV4 HV Owner's manual

Toyota RAV4, RAV4 HV Owner's manual
1
QUICK GUIDE
11
2
BASIC FUNCTION
31
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
71
4
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
137
5
INFORMATION
151
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
157
7
PHONE
219
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
263
9
Entune App Suite
335
INDEX
349
For more information about the following items, see the “Owner’s Manual”.
• Fuel consumption
• Vehicle customization settings
• Energy monitor
• Intuitive parking assist
1
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
Introduction
NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL
This manual explains the operation of this system. Please read this manual
carefully to ensure proper use. Keep this manual in your vehicle at all times.
The screen shots in this document and the actual screens of this system differ
depending on whether the functions and/or a contract existed and the map data
available at the time of producing this document.
Please be aware that the content of this manual may be different from this system in some cases, such as when the system’s software is updated.
2
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (ENTUNE PREMIUM AUDIO)
The Navigation System is one of the most technologically advanced vehicle accessories ever developed. The system receives satellite signals from the Global
Positioning System (GPS) operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. Using
these signals and other vehicle sensors, the system indicates your present position and assists in locating a desired destination.
The navigation system is designed to select efficient routes from your present
starting location to your destination. The system is also designed to direct you
to a destination that is unfamiliar to you in an efficient manner. The system uses
AISIN AW maps. The calculated routes may not be the shortest nor the least
traffic congested. Your own personal local knowledge or “short cut” may at
times be faster than the calculated routes.
The navigation system’s database includes Point of Interest categories to allow
you to easily select destinations such as restaurants and hotels. If a destination
is not in the database, you can enter the street address or a major intersection
close to it and the system will guide you there.
The system will provide both a visual map and audio instructions. The audio instructions will announce the distance remaining and the direction to turn in when
approaching an intersection. These voice instructions will help you keep your
eyes on the road and are timed to provide enough time to allow you to maneuver, change lanes or slow down.
Please be aware that all current vehicle navigation systems have certain limitations that may affect their ability to perform properly. The accuracy of the vehicle’s position depends on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle
condition or other circumstances. For more information on the limitations of the
system, refer to page 329.
3
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL
For safety reasons, this manual indicates items requiring particular attention
with the following marks.
WARNING
● This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk
of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
● This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in
order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your vehicle and its equipment.
SYMBOLS USED IN ILLUSTRATIONS
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do not do
this” or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate switches and other
devices.
4
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
No.
Name
Description
Operational
Outlines
An outline of the operation is explained.
Main Operations
The steps of an operation are explained.
Related Operations
A main operation’s supplementary operations are described.
Information
Useful information for the user is described.
■INFORMATION FOR HYBRID VEHICLES IS WRITTEN IN BRACKETS
NEXT TO THE INFORMATION FOR GASOLINE VEHICLES
Different writing styles for gasoline and hybrid vehicles
Example
When the engine*1 <power>*2 switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON*1
<ON>*2 mode, the initial screen will be displayed and the system will begin
operating.
*1: Vehicles with gasoline engine
*2: Vehicles with hybrid system
5
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
SAFETY INSTRUCTION
(ENTUNE AUDIO PLUS)
SAFETY INSTRUCTION
(ENTUNE PREMIUM AUDIO)
To use this system in the safest possible
manner, follow all the safety tips shown
below.
Do not use any feature of this system to
the extent it becomes a distraction and
prevents safe driving. The first priority
while driving should always be the safe operation of the vehicle. While driving, be
sure to observe all traffic regulations.
Prior to the actual use of this system, learn
how to use it and become thoroughly familiar with it. Read the entire manual to make
sure you understand the system. Do not
allow other people to use this system until
they have read and understood the instructions in this manual.
For your safety, some functions may become inoperable when driving. Unavailable screen buttons are dimmed.
WARNING
● For safety, the driver should not operate
the system while he/she is driving. Insufficient attention to the road and traffic
may cause an accident.
To use this system in the safest possible
manner, follow all the safety tips shown
below.
This system is intended to assist in reaching the destination and, if used properly,
can do so. The driver is solely responsible
for the safe operation of your vehicle and
the safety of your passengers.
Do not use any feature of this system to
the extent it becomes a distraction and
prevents safe driving. The first priority
while driving should always be the safe operation of the vehicle. While driving, be
sure to observe all traffic regulations.
Prior to the actual use of this system, learn
how to use it and become thoroughly familiar with it. Read the entire manual to make
sure you understand the system. Do not
allow other people to use this system until
they have read and understood the instructions in this manual.
For your safety, some functions may become inoperable when driving. Unavailable screen buttons are dimmed. Only
when the vehicle is not moving, can the
destination and route selection be done.
6
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
WARNING
● For safety, the driver should not operate
the system while he/she is driving. Insufficient attention to the road and traffic
may cause an accident.
● While driving, be sure to obey the traffic
regulations and maintain awareness of
the road conditions. If a traffic sign on
the road has been changed, route guidance may not have the updated information such as the direction of a one way
street.
While driving, listen to the voice instructions as much as possible and glance at
the screen briefly and only when it is safe.
However, do not totally rely on voice guidance. Use it just for reference. If the system cannot determine the current position
correctly, there is a possibility of incorrect,
late, or non-voice guidance.
The data in the system may occasionally
be incomplete. Road conditions, including
driving restrictions (no left turns, street closures, etc.) frequently change. Therefore,
before following any instructions from the
system, look to see whether the instruction
can be done safely and legally.
This system cannot warn about such
things as the safety of an area, condition of
streets, and availability of emergency services. If unsure about the safety of an area, do not drive into it. Under no
circumstances is this system a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgement.
Use this system only in locations where it
is legal to do so. Some states/provinces
may have laws prohibiting the use of video
and navigation screens next to the driver.
7
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS ................... 43
QUICK GUIDE
REGISTERING/CONNECTING
Bluetooth® DEVICE ............................. 43
1. BASIC FUNCTION........................... 12
OVERVIEW BUTTONS ......................... 12
“Apps” SCREEN .................................... 14
SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS ............. 48
3. OTHER SETTINGS ......................... 56
GENERAL SETTINGS ........................... 56
HOME SCREEN .................................... 16
VOICE SETTINGS ................................. 63
2. QUICK REFERENCE....................... 20
DRIVER SETTINGS............................... 65
“Setup” SCREEN ................................... 20
MAINTENANCE ..................................... 66
3. NAVIGATION OPERATION ............ 22
REGISTERING HOME .......................... 22
REGISTERING PRESET
DESTINATIONS.................................. 24
OPERATION FLOW:
GUIDING THE ROUTE ....................... 26
SETTING HOME AS THE
DESTINATION .................................... 27
4. FUNCTION INDEX........................... 28
FUNCTION INDEX ................................ 28
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
1. BASIC OPERATION ....................... 72
QUICK REFERENCE............................. 72
SOME BASICS....................................... 74
2. RADIO OPERATION....................... 80
AM/FM RADIO ....................................... 80
XM Satellite Radio.................................. 91
INTERNET RADIO ................................. 98
2
3. MEDIA OPERATION....................... 99
BASIC FUNCTION
CD .......................................................... 99
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE
OPERATION .................................. 32
USB MEMORY..................................... 103
INITIAL SCREEN................................... 32
Bluetooth® AUDIO................................ 113
TOUCH SCREEN GESTURES ............. 34
AUX ...................................................... 119
TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION ............ 35
4. AUDIO REMOTE CONTROLS...... 121
HOME SCREEN OPERATION .............. 36
iPod ...................................................... 108
STEERING SWITCHES ....................... 121
ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/
LIST SCREEN OPERATION............... 37
5. SETUP........................................... 124
SCREEN ADJUSTMENT....................... 40
AUDIO SETTINGS ............................... 124
LINKING MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY AND NAVIGATION
SYSTEM.............................................. 42
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE
AUDIO SYSTEM.......................... 126
OPERATING INFORMATION .............. 126
8
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
4
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST
MONITOR .................................... 168
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION ................................ 138
TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST
MONITOR ......................................... 168
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM.............. 138
ESTIMATED COURSE LINE
DISPLAY MODE ............................... 173
CASUAL SPEECH
RECOGNIZATION ............................ 145
PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE
DISPLAY MODE ............................... 175
COMMAND LIST ................................. 146
TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST
MONITOR PRECAUTIONS............... 177
2. MOBILE ASSISTANT
OPERATION ................................ 149
MOBILE ASSISTANT .......................... 149
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW .......... 182
3
4
5
CHECKING AROUND THE
VEHICLE ........................................... 191
INFORMATION
1. USEFUL INFORMATION............... 152
CHECKING THE FRONT AND
AROUND THE VEHICLE .................. 192
RECEIVING WEATHER
INFORMATION ................................. 152
CHECKING THE SIDES OF THE
VEHICLE ........................................... 195
RECEIVING TRAFFIC MAP
INFORMATION ................................. 154
CHECKING THE REAR AND
AROUND THE VEHICLE .................. 198
DATA SERVICES SETTINGS ............. 155
PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
PRECAUTIONS ................................ 205
6
2
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR .... 184
PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR ........... 184
5
1
6
7
8
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW .......... 215
PERIPHERAL MONITORING
SYSTEM
9
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR
SYSTEM....................................... 158
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM....... 158
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS ................................ 162
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW .......... 167
9
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
TABLE OF CONTENTS
7
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE ...................... 297
PHONE
ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN............. 297
1. PHONE OPERATION
(HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
FOR CELLULAR PHONES) ........ 220
TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE
PROMPTS ......................................... 302
QUICK REFERENCE .......................... 220
4. MEMORY POINTS ........................ 308
SOME BASICS .................................... 221
MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS............ 308
CALLING ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE.............................................. 225
5. SETUP........................................... 318
EDITING ROUTE ................................. 303
DETAILED NAVIGATION
SETTINGS......................................... 318
RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE.............................................. 231
TALKING ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE.............................................. 232
Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE
FUNCTION........................................ 235
TRAFFIC SETTINGS ........................... 322
6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION
SYSTEM ...................................... 329
GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING
SYSTEM)........................................... 329
2. SETUP ........................................... 240
MAP DATABASE VERSION AND
COVERED AREA .............................. 332
PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS .......... 240
3. WHAT TO DO IF... ......................... 253
TROUBLESHOOTING......................... 253
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
9
Entune App Suite
1. Entune App Suite OVERVIEW .... 336
Entune App Suite SERVICE................. 336
1. BASIC OPERATION...................... 264
QUICK REFERENCE .......................... 264
MAP SCREEN OPERATION ............... 267
MAP SCREEN INFORMATION ........... 273
TRAFFIC INFORMATION.................... 277
2. DESTINATION SEARCH............... 281
2. Entune App Suite
OPERATION................................ 341
Entune App Suite ................................. 341
3. SETUP........................................... 348
Entune App Suite SETTINGS .............. 348
DESTINATION SEARCH SCREEN..... 281
SEARCH OPERATION........................ 283
INDEX
STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ......... 293
ALPHABETICAL INDEX................... 350
10
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1
1
QUICK GUIDE
2
1
BASIC FUNCTION
3
1. OVERVIEW BUTTONS .................. 12
4
2. “Apps” SCREEN ........................... 14
3. HOME SCREEN ............................. 16
5
STATUS DISPLAY................................. 18
2
6
QUICK REFERENCE
1. “Setup” SCREEN .......................... 20
3
7
NAVIGATION OPERATION
8
1. REGISTERING HOME ................... 22
2. REGISTERING PRESET
DESTINATIONS ........................... 24
3. OPERATION FLOW:
GUIDING THE ROUTE................. 26
4. SETTING HOME AS THE
DESTINATION ............................. 27
4
FUNCTION INDEX
1. FUNCTION INDEX ......................... 28
11
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
9
1. BASIC FUNCTION
1. OVERVIEW BUTTONS
Entune Audio Plus
Entune Premium Audio
12
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC FUNCTION
No.
Function
Page
Press to eject a disc.
1
76
QUICK GUIDE
By touching the screen with your finger, you can control the selected
functions.
34, 35
Insert a disc into this slot. The CD player turns on immediately.
76
Press to access the Bluetooth® hands-free system.
220
Turn the “TUNE SCROLL” knob to select a radio station or skip to the
next or previous track/file.
80, 91, 99,
103, 108,
113
Press the “ ” or “ ” button to seek up or down for a radio station or to
access a desired track/file.
80, 91, 99,
103, 108,
113
Press to play/pause.
80, 99, 103,
108, 113,
119
Press to display the home screen.
16, 36
Press to display the “Apps” screen.
14
Press to access the audio system. The audio system turns on in the
last mode used.
72, 75
Press the “PWR VOL” knob to turn the system on and off, and turn it
to adjust the volume.
75
MAP card slot
Do not eject the SD card, as doing so may deactivate the navigation
system.
333
13
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC FUNCTION
2. “Apps” SCREEN
Press the “APPS” button to display the “Apps” screen.
Entune Premium Audio
Entune Audio Plus
14
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC FUNCTION
No.
Function
Page
264
Select to display the audio control screen.
72
Select to display the hands-free operation screen.
220
Select to display the “Message Inbox” screen.
235
Select to display weather information.
152
Select to reorder the applications.
• Select the desired application then
or
to reorder.
343
Select to display traffic information.
154, 277
Select to display the “Setup” screen.
20
Select to update the applications.
342
Select to display the fuel consumption screen.
1
QUICK GUIDE
Select to display the map screen.
“Owner’s
Manual”
Select to display the “Maintenance” screen.
66
Select to display the application screen.
336
If a turn-by-turn navigation application has been downloaded to a connected phone, the application will be displayed and can be used.
⎯
INFORMATION
● When there are two pages, select
or
to change the page.
15
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC FUNCTION
3. HOME SCREEN
Press the “HOME” button to display the home screen.
The home screen can display multiple information screens, such as the audio system screen, hands-free screen, application screen and clock screen, simultaneously. When a screen is selected, the selected screen is switched to a full-screen
display. The home screen can be set to either a three-way split screen or a twoway split screen.
For details about setting the home screen: →P.36
Three-way split screen
16
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC FUNCTION
Two-way split screen
1
QUICK GUIDE
No.
Function
Page
Displays the current time
Select the displaying time to set the clock. (→P.58)
The clock setting can be also set from the “General Settings” screen.
(→P.56)
⎯
Displays the condition of the Bluetooth® connection
18
Select to display the “Setup” screen.
20
INFORMATION
● Entune Audio Plus only: Turn-by-turn navigation application screen can be displayed.
17
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC FUNCTION
STATUS DISPLAY
The condition of the Bluetooth® connection, as well as the level of reception and
the amount of cellular phone battery charge left, are displayed on the status display.
18
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC FUNCTION
No.
Indicators
Conditions
The condition of
the
Bluetooth®
connection
The level of reception
The amount of
battery
charge
left
Poor
(Blue)
Good
• An antenna for the Bluetooth® connection is built into the instrument panel. The condition of the Bluetooth® connection may deteriorate and the system may not function when a Bluetooth® phone
is used in the following conditions and/or places:
The cellular phone is obstructed by certain objects (such as when
it is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box).
The cellular phone is touching or is covered with metal materials.
• Leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where the condition of the
Bluetooth® connection is good.
Poor
Excellent
• The level of reception does not always correspond with the level
displayed on the cellular phone. The level of reception may not be
displayed depending on the phone you have.
When the cellular phone is out of the service area or in a place
inaccessible by radio waves, “No Service” is displayed.
• “RM” is displayed when receiving in a roaming area. While roaming, display “RM” top-left on the icon.
• The receiving area may not be displayed depending on the type of
phone you have.
Empty
Full
• The amount displayed does not always correspond with the
amount displayed on the Bluetooth® device.
The amount of battery charge left may not be displayed depending on the type of the Bluetooth® device connected.
This system does not have a charging function.
19
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
QUICK GUIDE
(Gray)
No connection
1
2. QUICK REFERENCE
1. “Setup” SCREEN
The items shown on the “Setup” screen can be set. Press the “APPS” button, then
select “Setup” to display the “Setup” screen.
Entune Premium Audio
Entune Audio Plus
20
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. QUICK REFERENCE
No.
Page
Select to change the selected language, operation sound, automatic
screen change settings, etc.
56
Select to customize the home screen.
36
Select to set the voice settings.
63
Select to adjust the contrast and brightness of the screens.
40
Select to set memory points (home, preset destinations, address book
entries, areas to avoid), navigation details or to delete previous destinations.
308, 318
Select to set audio settings.
124
Select to set the phone sound, contacts, message settings, etc.
240
Select to set Bluetooth® phones and Bluetooth® audio devices.
48
Select to turn the screen off.
⎯
*
Select to set Entune App Suite settings.
348
*
Select to set data services settings.
155
Select to link the driver’s cellular phone settings. (audio presets, language, etc.)
65
“Owner’s
Manual”
Select to set vehicle information.
*
1
QUICK GUIDE
Function
Select to set traffic information.
322
⎯
Select to change the phone data plan pop-up message timing.
*: Only for U.S.A.
21
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. NAVIGATION OPERATION
1. REGISTERING HOME*
1
2
3
Press the “APPS” button.
4
Select “Go Home”.
5
Select “Yes”.
6
There are different kinds of methods to search for your home.
(→P.281)
Select “Navigation”.
Select “Dest.”.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
22
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. NAVIGATION OPERATION
Select “Enter”.
8
Select “OK”.
1
QUICK GUIDE
7
Registration of home is complete.
Registering home in a different way
→P.309
Editing the name, location, phone number and icon
→P.309
Setting home as the destination
→P.284
23
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. NAVIGATION OPERATION
2. REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS*
1
Press the “APPS” button.
2
Select “Navigation”.
3
4
Select one of the preset destination buttons.
5
Select “Yes”.
6
There are different kinds of methods to search for a destination.
(→P.281)
Select “Dest.”.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
24
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. NAVIGATION OPERATION
7
Select “Enter”.
8
Select a position for this preset
destination.
9
Select “OK”.
1
QUICK GUIDE
Registration of preset destinations is
complete.
Registering preset destinations in a different way
→P.310
Editing the name, location, phone number and icon
→P.311
Setting preset destinations as the destination
→P.284
25
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. NAVIGATION OPERATION
3. OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE*
1
Press the “APPS” button.
4
There are different kinds of methods to search for a destination.
(→P.281)
2
Select “Navigation”.
5
Select “Go”.
3
Select “Dest.”.
6 Select “OK”.
Selecting routes other than the one recommended. (→P.293)
Guidance to the destination is displayed
on the screen and can be heard via
voice guidance.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
26
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. NAVIGATION OPERATION
4. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION*
1
Press the “APPS” button.
5
Guidance to the destination is displayed
on the screen and can be heard via
voice guidance.
2
Select “Navigation”.
3
Select “Dest.”.
4
Select “Go Home”.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
27
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1
QUICK GUIDE
Select “OK”.
Selecting routes other than the one recommended. (→P.293)
4. FUNCTION INDEX
1. FUNCTION INDEX
Map*
Displaying maps
Page
Viewing the map screen
264
Displaying the current position
267
Viewing the current position vicinity map
271
Changing the scale
268
Changing the map orientation
268
Displaying map information
273
Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination
297
Selecting the map mode
269
Displaying traffic information
277
Searching for destinations
Page
Searching for the destination
283
Changing the search area
284
Route guidance*
Before starting or during route guidance
Page
Starting route guide
293
Editing the route
303
Viewing the entire route map
298
Pausing guidance
296
Adjusting route guidance volume
63
Deleting the destination
304
Address book
Page
Registering address book entries
312
Marking icons on the map
313
*: Entune Premium Audio only
28
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
4. FUNCTION INDEX
Useful functions
1
Information
Page
QUICK GUIDE
Displaying vehicle maintenance*
66
Hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Registering/connecting Bluetooth® phone
43
®
Making a call on a Bluetooth phone
225
®
Receiving a call on the Bluetooth phone
231
Voice command system
Operating the system with your voice
Page
138
Peripheral monitoring system
Viewing behind the rear of the vehicle
Page
Page
157
*: Entune Premium Audio only
29
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
30
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2
1
BASIC FUNCTION
2
1
BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE
OPERATION
2
Bluetooth® SETTINGS
3
1. INITIAL SCREEN ........................... 32
1. REGISTERING/CONNECTING
Bluetooth® DEVICE ................... 43
2. TOUCH SCREEN GESTURES ...... 34
REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
PHONE FOR THE FIRST TIME .......... 43
3. TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION .... 35
REGISTERING A Bluetooth® AUDIO
PLAYER FOR THE FIRST TIME......... 44
4. HOME SCREEN OPERATION ...... 36
PROFILES ............................................. 46
5. ENTERING LETTERS AND
NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN
OPERATION ................................ 37
2. SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS ... 48
4
5
6
“Bluetooth* Setup” SCREEN.................. 48
REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE ............................................... 49
ENTERING LETTERS AND
NUMBERS .......................................... 37
DELETING A Bluetooth® DEVICE ......... 50
LIST SCREEN ....................................... 37
CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE... 51
7
8
®
6. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT ............... 40
EDITING THE Bluetooth DEVICE
INFORMATION ................................... 53
7. LINKING MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY AND NAVIGATION
SYSTEM....................................... 42
“System Settings” SCREEN................... 54
3
OTHER SETTINGS
1. GENERAL SETTINGS .................. 56
GENERAL SETTINGS SCREEN ........... 56
2. VOICE SETTINGS......................... 63
VOICE SETTINGS SCREEN ................. 63
3. DRIVER SETTINGS ...................... 65
MANUALLY SELECT LINKED
SETTINGS .......................................... 65
4. MAINTENANCE ............................ 66
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
31
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
9
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
1. INITIAL SCREEN
1
When the engine switch is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position, the initial screen will
be displayed and the system will begin
operating. (Vehicles without a smart
key system)
When the engine <power> switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON>
mode, the initial screen will be displayed and the system will begin operating. (Vehicles with a smart key
system)
MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION*
This system reminds users when to replace certain parts or components and
shows dealer information (if registered) on the screen.
When the vehicle reaches a previously
set driving distance or date specified
for a scheduled maintenance check,
the “Maintenance Reminder” screen
will be displayed when the system is
turned on.
 Images shown on the initial screen can
be changed to suit individual preferences. (→P.59)
 After a few seconds, the “Caution” screen
will be displayed.
 After about 5 seconds, the “Caution”
screen automatically switches to the next
screen.
WARNING
 To prevent the screen from being displayed again, select “Do Not Tell Me
Again”.
 To register maintenance information:
→P.66
 If
is selected, the registered
phone number can be called.
● When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running <the hybrid system operating>, always apply the parking brake
for safety.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
32
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
RESTARTING THE SYSTEM
When system response is extremely
slow, the system can be restarted.
1
2
BASIC FUNCTION
Press and hold the “PWR VOL” knob
for 3 seconds or more.
Entune Audio Plus
Entune Premium Audio
33
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
2. TOUCH SCREEN GESTURES
Operations are performed by touching the touch screen directly with your finger.
Operation method
Outline
Main use
Touch
Quickly touch and release
once.
Changing and selecting various settings
Drag*1
Touch the screen with
your finger, and move the
screen to the desired position.
• Scrolling the lists
• Scrolling the map screen*2
Flick*1
Quickly move the screen
by flicking with your finger.
• Scrolling the main screen page
• Scrolling the map screen*2
*1: The above operations may not be performed on all screens.
*2
: Entune Premium Audio only
INFORMATION
● Flick operations may not be performed smoothly in high altitudes.
34
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
3. TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION
This system is operated mainly by the
buttons on the screen. (Referred to as
screen buttons in this manual.)
NOTICE
● To prevent damaging the screen, lightly
touch the screen buttons with your finger.
● Do not use objects other than your finger
to touch the screen.
● Wipe off fingerprints using a glass cleaning cloth. Do not use chemical cleaners
to clean the screen, as they may damage the touch screen.
● If the system does not respond to touching a screen button, move your finger
away from the screen and then touch it
again.
● Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated.
● The displayed image may become
darker and moving images may be
slightly distorted when the screen is
cold.
● In extremely cold conditions, the map
may not be displayed and the data input
by a user may be deleted. Also, the
screen buttons may be harder than
usual to depress.
● When you look at the screen through
polarized material such as polarized
sunglasses, the screen may be dark and
hard to see. If so, look at the screen
from different angles, adjust the screen
settings on the “Display Settings” screen
or take off your sunglasses.
35
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2
BASIC FUNCTION
 When a screen button is touched, a
beep sounds. (To set the beep sound,
see page 56.)
INFORMATION
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
4. HOME SCREEN OPERATION
The home screen can display multiple
information screens, such as the audio
system screen and hands-free screen,
simultaneously.
1
2
CUSTOMIZING THE HOME
SCREEN
The display items/area on the home
screen can be changed.
Press the “HOME” button.
“Home” screen is displayed.
 When a screen is selected, the selected
screen will change to a full-screen display.
1
Select
2
Select “Home Screen”.
.
 Select “Two Panel” or “Three Panel”.
3
4
5
Select the desired area.
Select the desired item.
Select “OK”.
INFORMATION
● When the selected item is already being
displayed and another area is selected
for that item, the item that it is replacing
will be displayed in the original item’s
location.
36
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
5. ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION
When searching by an address, name,
etc., or entering data, letters and numbers can be entered via the screen.
LIST SCREEN
The list screen may be displayed after
entering characters.
ENTERING LETTERS AND
NUMBERS
1
No.
Function
BASIC FUNCTION
DISPLAYING THE LIST
Enter characters and select “OK”.
 Matching items from the database are
listed even if the entered address or name
is incomplete.
 The list will be displayed automatically if
the maximum number of characters is
entered or matching items can be displayed on a single list screen.
Select to enter desired characters.
Text field. Entered character(s) will
be displayed.
During entering character(s), when
there is only one available option for
the next character(s), the next character(s) will be displayed in gray text
in the text field automatically. Gray
text is entered by selecting this button.
Select to erase one character. Select
and hold to continue erasing characters.
Select to display the alphabet keys.
Select to display other symbols.
 On certain letter entry screens, letters can
be entered in upper or lower case.
: Select to enter in lower case.
: Select to enter in upper case.
 Keyboard layout can be changed.
(→P.56)
37
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
2
20:05
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
LIST SCREEN OPERATION
INFORMATION
● The number of matching items is shown
on the right side of the screen. If the
number of matching items is more than
999, the system displays “∗∗∗” on the
screen.
When a list is displayed, use the appropriate screen button to scroll through
the list.
■SELECTING ALL ITEMS
Some lists contain “Select All”. If “Select All” is selected, it is possible to
select all items.
1
Select “Select All”.
Icon
Function
Select to skip to the next or previous page.
Select and hold
or
to
scroll through the displayed list.
This indicates the
screen’s position.
“Unselect All”: Unselect all items in the
list.
If
displayed
appears to the right of an
item name, the complete name is
too long to display.
Select
to scroll to the end of
the name.
Select
to move to the begin-
ning of the name.
38
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
SORTING
1
Select “Sort”.
Some lists contain character screen
buttons, “ABC”, “DEF” etc., which allow a direct jump to list entries that begin with the same letter as the
character screen button.
1
2
Select the desired character jump buttons.
Select the desired sorting criteria.
INFORMATION
● Every time the same character screen
button is selected, the list starting with
the subsequent character is displayed.
39
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2
BASIC FUNCTION
The order of a list displayed on the
screen can be sorted in the order of
distance from the current location,
date, category, etc.
CHARACTER JUMP BUTTONS
IN LISTS
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
6. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT
The contrast and brightness of the
screen display and the image of the
camera display can be adjusted. The
screen can also be changed to either
day or night mode.
1
No.
Function
Page
Select to adjust the screen
display.
Select to adjust the camera
display.
Press the “APPS” button.
Select to turn day mode on/
off.
Entune Audio Plus
41
40
INFORMATION
● When the screen is viewed through
polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pattern
may appear on the screen due to optical
characteristics of the screen. If this is
disturbing, please operate the screen
without polarized sunglasses.
CHANGING BETWEEN DAY
AND NIGHT MODE
Entune Premium Audio
Depending on the position of the headlight switch, the screen changes to day
or night mode. This feature is available
when the headlight is switched on.
1
Select “Day Mode”.
INFORMATION
2
3
4
Select “Setup”.
Select “Display”.
● If the screen is set to day mode with the
headlight switch turned on, this condition
is memorized even with the engine
<hybrid system> turned off.
Select the items to be set.
40
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
ADJUSTING THE CONTRAST/
BRIGHTNESS
Function
“Brightness” “+”
Select to brighten the
screen.
“Brightness” “-”
Select to darken the
screen.
“Contrast” “+”
Select to strengthen the
contrast of the screen.
“Contrast” “-”
Select to weaken the
contrast of the screen.
The contrast and brightness of the
screen can be adjusted according to
the brightness of your surroundings.
1
2
Select “General” or “Camera”.
Select the desired item.
General
3
Select “OK”.
Camera
41
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2
BASIC FUNCTION
Screen button
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
7. LINKING MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM*
The following functions of the navigation system are linked with the multi-information display in the instrument cluster:
• Navigation
• Audio
etc.
These functions can be operated using multi-information display control switches
on the steering wheel. For details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.
*: If equipped
42
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
1. REGISTERING/CONNECTING Bluetooth® DEVICE
3
REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
PHONE FOR THE FIRST TIME
Select “Phone”.
 Operations up to this point can also be
performed by pressing the
Once the phone has been registered, it
is possible to use the hands-free system.
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.
For details about registering
Bluetooth® device: →P.49
1
4
5
switch on the
Select “Yes” to register a phone.
When this screen is displayed, search
for the device name displayed on this
screen on the screen of your
Bluetooth® device.
a
Turn the Bluetooth® connection setting
of your cellular phone on.
 This function is not available when
Bluetooth® connection setting of your cellular phone is set to off.
2
the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
switch on
Press the “APPS” button.
Entune Audio Plus
 For details about operating the Bluetooth®
device, see the manual that comes with it.
 To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.
Entune Premium Audio
43
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2
BASIC FUNCTION
To use the hands-free system, it is
necessary to register a Bluetooth®
phone with the system.
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
6
Register the Bluetooth® device using
®
your Bluetooth device.
 A PIN-code is not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible
Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the
type of Bluetooth® device being connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the Bluetooth®
device’s screen. Respond and operate the
Bluetooth® device according to the confirmation message.
7
Check that the screen is displayed
when registration is complete.
 The system waits for connection requests
coming from the registered device.
®
 At this stage, the Bluetooth functions are
not yet available.
8
Select “OK” when the connection status changes from “Connecting...” to
“Connected”.
REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
AUDIO PLAYER FOR THE
FIRST TIME
To use the Bluetooth® Audio, it is necessary to register an audio player with
the system.
Once the player has been registered, it
is possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio.
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.
For details about registering
Bluetooth® device: →P.49
1
a
Turn the Bluetooth® connection setting
of your audio player on.
 This function is not available when the
Bluetooth® connection setting of your
audio player is set to off.
 If an error message is displayed, follow
the guidance on the screen to try again.
44
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
2
Press the “AUDIO” button.
Entune Audio Plus
2
BASIC FUNCTION
Entune Premium Audio
3
Select “Source” on the audio screen
or press “AUDIO” button again.
4
5
Select “
6
Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A
Audio”.
Select “Yes” to register an audio player.
Bluetooth® DEVICE” from “STEP 2”.
(→P.49)
45
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
PROFILES
This system supports the following services.
Bluetooth®
Device
Bluetooth®
Phone/
Bluetooth®
Audio
Player
Spec.
Bluetooth® Specification
Bluetooth®
Device
Profile
HFP (Hands-Free Profile)
OPP (Object Push Profile)
Bluetooth®
Phone
Bluetooth®
Audio
Player
PBAP (Phone Book
Access profile)
Function
Requirements
Recommendations
Ver. 2.0
Ver. 3.0
+EDR
Requirements
Recommendations
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.6
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.2
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.1
Registering
a Bluetooth®
device
Function
Hands-free
system
Transferring the
contacts
MAP (Message Access
Profile)
Bluetooth®
phone message
⎯
Ver. 1.0
SPP (Serial Port Profile)
Connected navigation*1/Entune
App Suite*2
⎯
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.2
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.4
A2DP (Advanced Audio
Distribution Profile)
AVRCP (Audio/Video
Remote Control Profile)
Bluetooth® audio
system
*1: Entune Audio Plus
*2: Entune Premium Audio
INFORMATION
● If your cellular phone does not support HFP, registering the Bluetooth® phone or using
OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles individually will not be possible.
● If the connected Bluetooth® device version is older than recommended or incompatible,
the Bluetooth® device function may not work properly.
● Refer to http://www.toyota.com/entune/ to find approved Bluetooth® phones for this system.
46
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
47
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2
BASIC FUNCTION
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and any use of such marks by Fujitsu Ten Limited is under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their respective owners.
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
2. SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS
1
Press the “APPS” button.
“Bluetooth* Setup” SCREEN
Entune Audio Plus
Function
Entune Premium Audio
Page
®
Registering a Bluetooth device
49
Bluetooth®
50
Deleting a
device
Connecting a Bluetooth® device
51
Editing the Bluetooth® device information
53
Bluetooth® system settings
54
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
2
3
4
Select “Setup”.
Select “Bluetooth*”.
Select the desired item to be set.
48
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE
DISPLAYING THE “Bluetooth*
Setup” SCREEN IN A
DIFFERENT WAY
1
2
3
4
phone/message
settings
Press the “APPS” button.
Select “Setup”.
Select “Phone”.
2
Bluetooth® compatible phones (HFP)
and audio players (AVP) can be registered simultaneously.
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.
Select “Connect Phone”.
From the status display
1
Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices can be registered.
BASIC FUNCTION
From the
screen
Select status display area on the
screen.
1
Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.
(→P.48)
2
Select “Add”.
When another Bluetooth® device is connected
 To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,
select “Yes”.
When 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered
 A registered device needs to be replaced.
Select “Yes”, and select the device to be
replaced.
3
When this screen is displayed, search
for the device name displayed on this
screen on the screen of your
Bluetooth® device.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
49
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
 For details about operating the Bluetooth®
device, see the manual that comes with it.
 To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.
4
Register the Bluetooth® device using
your Bluetooth® device.
 A PIN-code is not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible
Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the
type of Bluetooth® device being connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the Bluetooth®
device’s screen. Respond and operate the
Bluetooth® device according to the confirmation message.
5
Check that the screen is displayed
when registration is complete.
 The system waits for connection requests
coming from the registered device.
 At this stage, the Bluetooth® functions are
not yet available.
6
Select “OK” when the connection status changes from “Connection waiting...” to “Connected”.
DELETING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE
1
Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.
(→P.48)
2
3
Select “Remove”.
4
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
5
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
Select the desired device.
INFORMATION
● When deleting a Bluetooth® phone, the
contact data will be deleted at the same
time.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
 If an error message is displayed, follow
the guidance on the screen to try again.
50
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
3
CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE
When another Bluetooth® device is connected
®
If more than 1 Bluetooth device has
been registered, select which device to
connect to.
2
Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.
(→P.48)
Select the device to be connected.
 To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,
select “Yes”.
4
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the connection is complete.
 If an error message is displayed, follow
the guidance on the screen to try again.
INFORMATION
● It may take time if the device connection
is carried out during Bluetooth® audio
playback.
● Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
device being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on
the device.
● When disconnecting a Bluetooth®
device, it is recommended to disconnect
using this system.
 Supported profile icons will be displayed.
: Phone
: Audio player
: Phone/Entune App Suite service
(Entune Premium Audio only)
 The profile icon for a currently connected
device will be displayed in color.
 Selecting a profile icon which is not currently connected will switch the connection to the function.
 If the desired Bluetooth® device is not
on the list, select “Add” to register the
device. (→P.49)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
51
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2
BASIC FUNCTION
Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices (Phones
(HFP) and audio players (AVP)) can be
registered.
1
Select the desired connection.
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
■AUTO CONNECTION MODE
■RECONNECTING THE Bluetooth®
PHONE
To turn auto connection mode on, set
“Bluetooth* Power” to on. (→P.54)
Leave the Bluetooth® device in a location where the connection can be established.
Vehicles without a smart key system
 When the engine switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position, the system searches for a
nearby registered device.
 The system will connect with the registered device that was last connected, if it
is nearby.
Vehicles with a smart key system
 When the engine <power> switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON>
mode, the system searches for a nearby
registered device.
 The system will connect with the registered device that was last connected, if it
is nearby.
■CONNECTING MANUALLY
If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnected
due to poor reception from the
Bluetooth® network when the engine
<power> switch is in the following, the
system automatically reconnect the
Bluetooth® phone.
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is turned to the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine <power> switch is turned
to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
<ON> mode.
 If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnected on
purpose, such as turning it off, this does
not happen. Reconnect the Bluetooth®
phone manually.
When the auto connection has failed or
“Bluetooth* Power” is turned off, it is
necessary to connect Bluetooth® manually.
1
Press the “APPS” button and select
“Setup”.
2
3
Select “Bluetooth*”.
Follow the steps in “CONNECTING A
Bluetooth® DEVICE” from “STEP 2”.
(→P.51)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
52
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
EDITING THE Bluetooth®
DEVICE INFORMATION
No.
The name of the Bluetooth® device.
Can be changed to a desired name.
(→P.54)
Select to set the Bluetooth® audio
player connection method. (→P.54)
1
Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.
(→P.48)
Device address is unique to the device and cannot be changed.
2
3
Select the desired device to be edited.
Phone number of the Bluetooth®
phone.
Select “Device Info”.
Compatibility
profile
Bluetooth® device.
of
the
Select to reset all setup items.
INFORMATION
4
Confirm and change the Bluetooth®
device information.
● If 2 Bluetooth® devices have been registered with the same device name, the
devices can be distinguished referring to
the device’s address.
● Depending on the type of phone, some
information may not be displayed.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
53
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2
BASIC FUNCTION
The Bluetooth® device’s information
can be displayed on the screen. The
displayed information can be edited.
Information
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
CHANGING A DEVICE NAME
1
2
“System Settings” SCREEN
Select “Device Name”.
The Bluetooth® settings can be confirmed and changed.
Enter the name and select “OK”.
INFORMATION
● Even if the device name is changed, the
name registered in your Bluetooth®
device does not change.
1
Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.
(→P.48)
2
3
Select “System Settings”.
Select the desired item to be set.
SETTING AUDIO PLAYER
CONNECTION METHOD
1
Select “Connect
From”.
2
Select the desired connection method.
Audio
Player
“Vehicle”: Select to connect the audio
system to the audio player.
“Device”: Select to connect the audio
player to the audio system.
 Depending on the audio player, the “Vehicle” or “Device” connection method may
be best. As such, refer to the manual that
comes with the audio player.
 To reset the connection method, select
“Default”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
54
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
No.
Page
Select to set Bluetooth®
connection on/off.
55
Displays system name.
Can be changed to a desired name.
55
PIN-code used when the
Bluetooth® device was registered. Can be changed to
a desired code.
55
Device address is unique
to the device and cannot be
changed.
⎯
Select to set the phone
connection status display
on/off.
⎯
Select to set the connection status display of the
audio player on/off.
⎯
Compatibility profile of the
system device.
⎯
Select to reset all setup
items.
⎯
Vehicles without a smart key system
The Bluetooth® device is automatically
connected when the engine switch is
turned to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The Bluetooth® device is automatically
connected when the engine <power>
switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON> mode.
When “Bluetooth* Power” is off:
The Bluetooth® device is disconnected,
and the system will not connect to it next
time.
INFORMATION
● While driving, the auto connection state
can be changed from off to on, but cannot be changed from on to off.
EDITING THE Bluetooth* NAME
1
2
Select “Bluetooth* Name”.
Enter a name and select “OK”.
EDITING THE PIN-CODE
CHANGING “Bluetooth*
Power”
1
Select “Bluetooth* Power”.
When “Bluetooth* Power” is on:
1
2
Select “Bluetooth* PIN”.
Enter a PIN-code and select “OK”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
55
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2
BASIC FUNCTION
Information
3. OTHER SETTINGS
1. GENERAL SETTINGS
Settings are available for system time,
operation sounds, etc.
1
GENERAL SETTINGS
SCREEN
Press the “APPS” button.
Entune Audio Plus
Entune Premium Audio
2
3
4
Select “Setup”.
Select “General”.
Select the items to be set.
56
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. OTHER SETTINGS
No.
No.
Function
Select to change the time zone and
set the daylight saving time and automatic adjustment of the clock by
GPS on/off. (→P.58)
Select to set the animations on/off.
Select to customize the startup image. (→P.59)
2
Select to change the language.
Select to customize the screen off
image. (→P.61)
BASIC FUNCTION
*
Function
Select to change the unit of measure
for distance/fuel consumption.
Select to change the unit of weather
temperature.
Select to set the sound beeps on/off.
Select to change the screen button
color.
Select to change the keyboard layout.
Select to set automatic screen
changes from the audio control
screen to the home screen to on/off.
When set to on, the screen will automatically return to the home screen
from the audio control screen after
20 seconds.
Select to delete personal data.
(→P.62)
Select to update software versions.
For details, contact your Toyota
dealer.
Select to update “Gracenote®” database versions. For details, contact
your Toyota dealer.
Select to display the software information. Notices related to third party
software used in this product are enlisted. (This includes instructions for
obtaining such software, where applicable.)
Select to reset all setup items.
*: If equipped
Select to set a pop-up message displayed on an iPhone connected via
Bluetooth® on/off when an application on the iPhone needs to be activated.
57
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. OTHER SETTINGS
■SETTING THE TIME ZONE
CLOCK SETTINGS
1
2
Used for changing time zones and the
settings of daylight saving time, and
the on/off settings of automatic adjustment of the clock by GPS can be
changed.
1
Display the “General Settings” screen.
(→P.56)
2
3
Select “Clock”.
Select the items to be set.
No.
Select “Time Zone”.
Select the desired time zone.
 If “Auto” is selected, the time zone is
selected automatically by current vehicle
position. (Entune Premium Audio only)
Function
When “Auto Adjust by GPS” is turned
off, the clock can be manually adjusted. (→P.59)
Select to switch the AM/PM when the
24-Time Format is off.
Select to set clock for use 24-Hours
Format on/off.
Select to set automatic adjustment of
the clock by GPS on/off.
Select to change the time zone.
(→P.58)
Select to set daylight saving time on/
off. (Entune Audio Plus)
Select to change the daylight saving
time settings. When you choose
“Auto”, the navigation setting will
adjust for daylight saving time and
turn itself on/off as needed, based on
location. (Entune Premium Audio)
4
Select “OK”.
58
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. OTHER SETTINGS
■MANUAL CLOCK SETTING
When “Auto Adjust by GPS” is
turned off, the clock can be manually
adjusted.
Display the “Clock” screen. (→P.58)
Select the items to be set.
An image can be copied from a USB
memory and used as the startup and
screen off images.
Vehicles without a smart key system
When the engine switch is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position, the initial screen will
be displayed. (→P.32)
Vehicles with a smart key system
When the engine <power> switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON>
mode, the initial screen will be displayed. (→P.32)
No.
Function
Select  to set the time forward one
hour and  to set the time back one
hour.
Select  to set the time forward one
minute and  to set the time back
one minute.
Rounds to the nearest hour*.
*: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 → 1:00
1:30 to 1:59 → 2:00
59
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2
BASIC FUNCTION
1
2
CUSTOMIZING THE STARTUP
AND SCREEN OFF IMAGES
3. OTHER SETTINGS
■TRANSFERRING IMAGES
1
INFORMATION
Open the cover and connect a USB
memory.
 Turn on the power of the USB memory if it
is not turned on.
2
3
4
5
Press the “APPS” button.
6
7
Select “Transfer”.
● When saving the images to a USB,
name the folder that the startup image is
saved to “StartupImage” and name the
folder that the screen off image is saved
to “DisplayOffImage”. If these folder
names are not used, the system cannot
download the images. (The folder
names are case sensitive.)
● The compatible file extensions are JPG
and JPEG.
● Image files of 5 MB or less can be transferred.
● Up to 3 images can be downloaded.
● Files with non-ASCII filenames can not
be downloaded.
Select “Setup”.
Select “General”.
Select “Customize Startup Image” or
“Customize Screen Off Image”.
Select “Yes”.
60
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. OTHER SETTINGS
■SETTING THE STARTUP IMAGES
1
4
Display the “General Settings” screen.
(→P.56)
ES
1
Select “Customize Startup Image”.
Select the desired image.
Display the “General Settings” screen.
(→P.56)
2
Select “Customize Startup Image” or
“Customize Screen Off Image”.
3
Select “Delete All”.
4
Select “Yes”.
Select “OK”.
■SETTINGS THE SCREEN OFF IMAGES
1
Display the “General Settings” screen.
(→P.56)
2
Select “Customize Screen Off Image”.
3
Select the desired image.
4
Select “OK”.
61
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2
BASIC FUNCTION
2
3
■DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAG-
3. OTHER SETTINGS
DELETING PERSONAL DATA
NOTICE
1
Display the “General Settings” screen.
(→P.56)
2
3
Select “Delete Personal Data”.
4
Select “Delete”.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
 Registered or changed personal settings
will be deleted or returned to their default
conditions.
For example:
• General settings
• Navigation settings*
• Audio settings
• Phone settings
● Entune Premium Audio: Make sure the
map SD card is inserted when deleting
personal data. The personal data cannot
be deleted when the map microSD card
is removed.
 Vehicles without a smart key system
To delete the data, after inserting the
map microSD card, turn the engine
switch to “LOCK” position and then turn
the engine switch to “ACC” or “ON” position.
 Vehicles with a smart key system
To delete the data, after inserting the
map microSD card, turn the engine
<power> switch OFF and then turn the
engine <power> switch to ACCESSORY
or IGNITION ON <ON> mode.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
62
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. OTHER SETTINGS
2. VOICE SETTINGS
Voice volume, etc. can be set.
1
VOICE SETTINGS SCREEN
Press the “APPS” button.
Entune Audio Plus
2
BASIC FUNCTION
Entune Premium Audio
No.
Function
Select to adjust the volume of voice
guidance.
*
2
3
4
Select to set the voice guidance
during route guidance on/off.
Select to set the voice recognition
prompts.
Select “Setup”.
Select “Voice”.
Select to train voice recognition.
The voice command system adapt
the user accent.
Select the items to be set.
Select to set the voice prompt interrupt on/off.
INFORMATION
● “Voice Settings” screen can also be displayed from the voice recognition top
screen. (→P.141)
*
Select to set the web search engine.
The search engines are Entune App
Suite applications. (→P.341)
63
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. OTHER SETTINGS
No.
Function
Select to set the voice recognition
tutorial.
Select to reset all setup items.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
64
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. OTHER SETTINGS
3. DRIVER SETTINGS
1
Press the “APPS” button.
MANUALLY SELECT LINKED
SETTINGS
1
Display the driver settings screen.
(→P.65)
2
2
Select “Manually Select Linked Settings”.
BASIC FUNCTION
The driver settings feature will allow
the system to link some preferences
(such as audio presets, button colors,
language, etc.) to a paired Bluetooth®
phone.
3
Select the desired phone.
Entune Audio Plus
Entune Premium Audio
2
3
4
 After a few seconds, loaded screen automatically switches to the home screen.
Select “Setup”.
Select “Driver”.
Select “Enable this Feature”.
65
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. OTHER SETTINGS
4. MAINTENANCE*
When this system is turned on, the
“Maintenance Reminder” screen displays when it is time to replace a part
or certain components. (→P.32)
1
Press the “APPS” button.
No.
Function
Select to set the condition of parts or
components.
Select to add new information items
separately from provided ones.
Select to cancel all conditions which
have been entered.
Select to reset the item which have
expired conditions.
Select to call the registered dealer.
Select to register/edit dealer information. (→P.67)
2
3
Select “Maintenance”.
Select the desired item.
When set to on, the indicator will illuminate. The system is set to give
maintenance information with the
“Maintenance Reminder” screen.
(→P.32)
INFORMATION
● When the vehicle needs to be serviced,
the screen button color will change to
orange.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
66
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. OTHER SETTINGS
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
SETTING
1
INFORMATION
Select the desired part or component
screen button.
2
Set the conditions.
DEALER SETTING
Dealer information can be registered in
the system. With dealer information
registered, route guidance to the dealer is available.
No.
1
2
Function
Select to enter the next maintenance
date.
Select “Set Dealer”.
Select the desired item to search for
the location. (→P.281)
Select to enter the driving distance
until the next maintenance check.
Select to cancel the conditions which
have been entered.
Select to reset the conditions which
have expired.
3
Select “OK” after entering the conditions.
 The editing dealer screen appears after
setting the location.
67
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2
BASIC FUNCTION
 When the vehicle needs to be serviced,
the screen button color will change to
orange.
● For scheduled maintenance information,
refer to “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”
or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
● Depending on driving or road conditions,
the actual date and distance that maintenance should be performed may differ
from the stored date and distance in the
system.
3. OTHER SETTINGS
3
■EDITING DEALER OR CONTACT
Select the items to be edited.
NAME
1
Select “Edit” next to “Dealer” or “Contact”.
2
Enter the name and select “OK”.
■EDITING THE LOCATION
No.
Function
Page
Select to enter the name of
a dealer.
68
Select to enter the name of
a dealer member.
68
Select to set the location.
68
Select to enter the phone
number.
68
Select to delete the dealer
information displayed on
the screen.
⎯
Select to set the displayed
dealer as a destination.
293
1
2
Select “Edit” next to “Location”.
Scroll the map to the desired point
(→P.272) and select “OK”.
■EDITING PHONE NUMBER
1
2
Select “Edit” next to “Phone #”.
Enter the phone number and select
“OK”.
68
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. OTHER SETTINGS
2
BASIC FUNCTION
69
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
1
2
BASIC OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE ..................... 72
2. SOME BASICS............................... 74
TURNING THE SYSTEM
ON AND OFF ...................................... 75
SELECTING AN AUDIO SOURCE........ 75
DISC SLOT ............................................ 76
USB/AUX PORT .................................... 77
SOUND SETTINGS ............................... 77
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM ................ 79
RADIO OPERATION
1. AM/FM RADIO............................... 80
OVERVIEW ............................................ 80
PRESETTING A STATION .................... 84
SELECTING A STATION
FROM THE LIST ................................. 84
CACHING A RADIO PROGRAM ........... 85
RADIO BROADCAST DATA
SYSTEM .............................................. 86
TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT
(FM RADIO)......................................... 87
USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY...... 88
AVAILABLE HD Radio™
TECHNOLOGY.................................... 88
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE............... 90
2. XM Satellite Radio ........................ 91
OVERVIEW ............................................ 91
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN
XM Satellite Radio ............................... 93
DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID................. 95
PRESETTING A CHANNEL................... 95
SELECTING A CHANNEL
FROM THE LIST ................................. 96
IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
MALFUNCTIONS ................................ 97
3. INTERNET RADIO......................... 98
LISTENING TO INTERNET RADIO ....... 98
70
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3
1
AUDIO SYSTEM
2
3
4
MEDIA OPERATION
1. CD .................................................. 99
AUDIO REMOTE CONTROLS
3
1. STEERING SWITCHES............... 121
4
OVERVIEW ........................................... 99
PLAYING AN AUDIO CD .................... 102
5
SETUP
PLAYING AN MP3/WMA/AAC DISC ... 102
2. USB MEMORY............................. 103
5
1. AUDIO SETTINGS ...................... 124
AUDIO SETTINGS SCREEN............... 124
OVERVIEW ......................................... 103
6
PLAYING A USB AUDIO ..................... 107
3. iPod.............................................. 108
6
TIPS FOR OPERATING THE
AUDIO SYSTEM
7
OVERVIEW ......................................... 108
4.
iPod AUDIO ......................................... 112
1. OPERATING INFORMATION ..... 126
iPod VIDEO ......................................... 112
RADIO.................................................. 126
Bluetooth®
CD PLAYER AND DISC ...................... 127
AUDIO ...................... 113
OVERVIEW ......................................... 113
CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE............................................. 118
®
LISTENING TO Bluetooth AUDIO ..... 118
8
iPod...................................................... 129
FILE INFORMATION ........................... 130
TERMS ................................................ 133
ERROR MESSAGES........................... 135
5. AUX .............................................. 119
OVERVIEW ......................................... 119
71
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
9
1. BASIC OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
Press the “AUDIO” button to display the audio screen.
Entune Audio Plus
Entune Premium Audio
72
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
Function
Page
Using the radio
80, 91, 98
Playing an audio CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc*
99
Playing a USB memory
103
Playing an iPod
108
®
113
Using the AUX port
119
Using the steering wheel audio switches
121
Audio system settings
124
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
Playing a Bluetooth device
INFORMATION
● The display and button positions will differ depending on the type of the system.
*: Entune Audio Plus
73
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
2. SOME BASICS
This section describes some of the basic features of the audio system. Some
information may not pertain to your
system.
Vehicles without a smart key system
Your audio system works when the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Your audio system works when the engine <power> switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON>
mode.
WARNING
● For vehicles sold in U.S.A.:
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC
WARNING:
Changes
or
modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
● Laser products
Entune Audio Plus
• USE
OF
CONTROL
OR
ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY
RESULT
IN
HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE.
• THE
USE
OF
OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
WITH
THIS
PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE
HAZARD.
NOTICE
● To prevent the 12-volt battery from being
discharged, do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running <the hybrid system
is not operating>.
74
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON
AND OFF
SELECTING AN AUDIO
SOURCE
Entune Audio Plus
1
Press the “AUDIO” button.
Entune Audio Plus
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
Entune Premium Audio
Entune Premium Audio
“PWR•VOL” knob: Press to turn the audio
system on and off. The system turns on in
the last mode used. Turn this knob to adjust the volume.
“AUDIO” button: Press to display screen
buttons for the audio system.
2
Select “Source” on the audio screen
or press “AUDIO” button again.
3
Select the desired source.
 A function that enables automatic return
to the home screen from the audio
screen can be selected. (→P.56)
75
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
DISC SLOT*
INFORMATION
● Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated.
INSERTING A DISC
● When there are two pages, select
or
1
to change the page.
Insert a disc into the disc slot.
REORDERING THE AUDIO
SOURCE
1
Display the “Select Audio Source”
screen. (→P.75)
2
Select “Reorder”.
 After insertion, the disc is automatically
loaded.
EJECTING A DISC
1
3
button and remove the
Select the desired audio source then
or
4
Press the
disc.
Select “OK”.
to reorder.
NOTICE
● Never try to disassemble or oil any part
of the CD player. Do not insert anything
other than a disc into the slot.
*: Entune Audio Plus
76
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
SOUND SETTINGS
INFORMATION
● The player is intended for use with 4.7
in. (12 cm) discs only.
● When inserting a disc, gently insert the
disc with the label facing up.
USB/AUX PORT
Open the cover and connect a device.
The system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed to compensate for
increased vehicle noise.
1
Display the “Audio Settings” screen.
(→P.124)
Type A
2
3
Select “Automatic Sound Levelizer”.
Select “High”, “Mid”, “Low”, or
“Off”.
Type B
 Turn on the power of the device if it is not
turned on.
2
Select “Automatic Sound Levelizer”.
INFORMATION
● If a USB hub is plugged-in, two devices
can be connected at a time.
● Even if a USB hub is used to connect
more than two USB devices, only the
first two connected devices will be recognized.
77
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
1
AUTOMATIC SOUND
LEVELIZER (ASL)
1. BASIC OPERATION
TONE AND BALANCE
TONE:
1
Select “Sound” on the audio control
screen.
2
Select the desired screen button.
How good an audio program sounds is
largely determined by the mix of the
treble, mid and bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with
different mixes of treble, mid and bass.
BALANCE:
A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear
sound levels is also important.
Keep in mind that when listening to a
stereo recording or broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase
the volume of 1 group of sounds while
decreasing the volume of another.
No.
Function
Select “+” or “-” to adjust highpitched tones.
Select “+” or “-” to adjust midpitched tones.
Select “+” or “-” to adjust lowpitched tones.
Select to adjust the sound balance
between the front and rear speakers.
Select to adjust the sound balance
between the left and right speakers.
78
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
1
Press this switch to operate the voice
command system.
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
 The voice command system and its list
of commands can be operated.
(→P.138)
79
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. RADIO OPERATION
1. AM/FM RADIO
OVERVIEW
Select “AM” or “FM” on the “Select Audio Source” screen. (→P.75)
■CONTROL SCREEN
Entune Audio Plus
Top screen
Option screen
80
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. RADIO OPERATION
Entune Premium Audio
Top screen
3
Option screen
AUDIO SYSTEM
■CONTROL PANEL
Entune Audio Plus
81
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. RADIO OPERATION
Entune Premium Audio
No.
Function
Select to scroll the page of preset buttons.
Select to display the option screen.
Select to display the audio source selection screen.
Select to display the sound setting screen.
Select to display a list of receivable stations/channels.
Select to scan for receivable stations/channels.
Select to store information of the audio currently being broadcast on the radio.
Select to tune to preset stations/channels.
Select to display the additional text information.
Analog FM only: Select to display RBDS text messages.
Select to turn HD Radio mode on/off.
When the “HD Radio™” indicator is off, the station list shows only analog broadcasts.
Cache radio only: Select to turn mute on/off.
Select to display the cache radio operation buttons. (→P.85)
82
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. RADIO OPERATION
No.
Function
• Turn to step up/down frequencies.
• Turn to move up/down the list. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the
list screens by pressing it.
• Press to seek for a station/channel.
• Press and hold for continuous seek.
*
3
Press to turn mute on/off.
AUDIO SYSTEM
Press to select an audio mode.
• Turn to adjust volume.
• Press to turn the audio system on/off.
• Press and hold to restart the audio system.
*: Entune Audio Plus
INFORMATION
● The radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received.
● The radio automatically blends to an HD Radio signal in AM or FM where available.
83
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. RADIO OPERATION
PRESETTING A STATION
SELECTING A STATION
FROM THE LIST
Radio mode has a mix preset function,
which can store up to 36 stations (6
stations per page x 6 pages) from any
of the AM, FM or SAT bands.
1
2
A station list can be displayed.
Tune in the desired station.
1
2
Select “Station List”.
3
Select the desired station and select
“OK”.
Select “(add new)”.
 To change the preset station to a different
one, select and hold the preset station.
3
Select “Yes” on the confirmation
screen.
4
Select “OK” after setting the new preset station.
FM radio only: Select the desired program genre.
INFORMATION
● The number of preset radio stations displayed on the screen can be changed.
(→P.125)
84
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. RADIO OPERATION
■REFRESHING THE STATION LIST
1
Select “Refresh” on the station list
screen and the following screen will be
displayed.
CACHING A RADIO
PROGRAM*
A radio program can be cached and
played back in a time-shifted manner.
3
The broadcast cached in the program
cache can be played back manually.
“Cancel Refresh”: Select to cancel the
refresh.
“Source”: Select to change to another audio source while refreshing.
1
Display the cache radio operation buttons. (→P.80)
2
Select the desired cache radio operation button.
INFORMATION
● The audio system sound is muted during
refresh operation.
● In some situations, it may take some
time to update the station list.
No.
Function
Hides the cache operation buttons
Skips backward 2 minutes
Fast rewinds continuously
Returns to the live radio broadcast
Fast forwards continuously
Skips forward 2 minutes
Red vertical bar: Shows what portion of the cached broadcast is currently playing
Light blue bar: Shows time in which
cache writing is in progress
*: Entune Premium Audio
85
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
AUDIO SYSTEM
PLAYING BACK THE CACHE
MANUALLY
2. RADIO OPERATION
AUTOMATIC PLAYBACK OF
THE CACHE
If the radio broadcast is interrupted by
another audio output, such as an
incoming phone call, the system will
automatically cache the interrupted
portion
and
perform
time-shift
playback when the interruption ends.
To manually operate the cache
operation: (→P.85)
INFORMATION
● The system can store up to 20 minutes.
Cached data will be erased when the
radio mode or station is changed or
when the audio system is turned off.
● If noise or silence occurs during the
caching process, cache writing will continue, with the noise or silence recorded
as is. In this case, the cached broadcast
will contain the noise or silence when
played back.
RADIO BROADCAST DATA
SYSTEM
This audio system is equipped with Radio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS).
RBDS mode allows text messages to
be received from radio stations that utilize RBDS transmitters.
When RBDS is on, the radio can
— only select stations of a particular
program type,
— display messages from radio stations,
— search for a stronger signal station.
RBDS features are available only
when listening to an FM station that
broadcasts RBDS information and the
“FM Info” indicator is on.
86
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. RADIO OPERATION
SELECTING A DESIRED
GENRE
1
2
TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT
(FM RADIO)
Select “Station List”.
FM radio only: Select a desired genre
of station and select a desired station.
1
2
Select “Station List”.
3
Select the desired traffic program station.
INFORMATION
● If a traffic program station is found, the
name of the traffic program station will
be displayed for a while.
87
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
AUDIO SYSTEM
 The genre list is in the following order:
• Classical
• Country
• EasyLis (Easy Listening)
• Inform (Information)
• Jazz
• News
• Oldies
• Other
• Pop Music
• Religion
• Rock
• R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
• Sports
• Talk
• Traffic (Not available when “HD Radio™”
indicator is off.)
• Alert (Emergency Alert)
A station that regularly broadcasts traffic information is automatically located.
2. RADIO OPERATION
USING HD Radio™
TECHNOLOGY
HD Radio™ Technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
radio product has a special receiver
which allows it to receive digital
broadcasts (where available) in
addition to the analog broadcasts it
already receives. Digital broadcasts
have better sound quality than analog
broadcasts as digital broadcasts
provide free, crystal clear audio with no
static or distortion. For more
information, and a guide to available
radio stations and programming, refer
to www.hdradio.com.
AVAILABLE HD Radio™
TECHNOLOGY
MULTICAST
On the FM radio frequency most digital
stations have “multiple” or supplemental programs on one FM station.
1
Select the “HD)” logo.
2
Select the desired channel.
 Turning the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob can
also select the desired multicast channel.
HD Radio Technology manufactured
under license from iBiquity Digital
Corporation.
U.S.
and Foreign
Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD
Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary
trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
88
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. RADIO OPERATION
PRESERVING A MUSIC
INFORMATION
INFORMATION
Tag information in the music broadcasting is preserved in the system and
transmits to an iPod.
Select “Tag” to bookmark the music
information.
2
Connect an iPod. (→P.77)
 Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not
turned on.
 Once an iPod is connected, the music tag
moves from the radio into the iPod.
 When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the
“tagged” information of the songs which
were tagged while listening to the radio
can be viewed. Then a user may decide to
purchase the song or CD/Album which
had been listened to on their radio.
89
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
1
● The tag information can not be preserved while scanning or caching the
radio station.
● If tagging the music information fails,
“Saving the HD Radio tag was unsuccessful.” will be displayed on the screen.
If this occurs, tag the information again.
● HD Radio™ stations can be preset.
● An orange “HD)” logo indicator will be
displayed on the screen when in digital.
The “HD)” logo will first appear in a gray
color indicating the station is indeed (an
analog and) a digital station. Once the
digital signal is acquired, the logo will
change to a bright orange color.
● The song title and artist name will
appear on the screen when available by
the radio station. The radio station can
send album pictures when available.
● As a user works through the analog
radio stations, (where applicable) the
radio receiver will automatically tune
from an analog signal to a digital signal
within 5 seconds.
2. RADIO OPERATION
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Experience
Cause
Action
Mismatch of time alignment- a user may hear a
short period of programming replayed or an echo,
stutter or skip.
The radio stations analog
and digital volume is not
properly aligned or the station is in ballgame mode.
None, radio broadcast issue. A
user can contact the radio station.
Sound fades, blending in
and out.
Radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Reception issue, may clear-up as
the vehicle continues to be driven.
Turning the indicator of the “HD
Radio™” button off can force radio
in an analog audio.
Audio mute condition when
an HD2/HD3 multicast
channel had been playing.
The radio does not have
access to digital signals at
the moment.
This is normal behavior, wait until
the digital signal returns. If out of
the coverage area, seek a new
station.
Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2/HD3 multicast channel preset.
The digital multicast content is not available until
HD Radio™ broadcast can
be decoded and make the
audio available. This takes
up to 7 seconds.
This is normal behavior, wait for
the audio to become available.
Text information does not
match the present song audio.
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified.
Complete the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences.
No text information shown
for the present selected frequency.
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified.
Complete the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences.
90
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. RADIO OPERATION
2. XM Satellite Radio*
OVERVIEW
Select “XM” on the “Select Audio Source” screen. (→P.75)
■CONTROL SCREEN
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
■CONTROL PANEL
Entune Audio Plus
*: If equipped
91
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. RADIO OPERATION
Entune Premium Audio
No.
Function
Select to scroll the page of preset buttons.
Select to display the option screen.
• Select to scan for receivable channels.
• Select “Additional Information” to display the information.
Select to display the audio source selection screen.
Select to display the sound setting screen.
Select to display a list of receivable channels.
Select to tune to preset channels.
• Turn to step up/down channels.
• Turn to move up/down the list. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the
list screens by pressing it.
• Press to seek for a channel.
• Press and hold for continuous seek.
Press to select an audio mode.
• Turn to adjust volume.
• Press to turn the audio system on/off.
• Press and hold to restart the audio system.
92
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. RADIO OPERATION
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN
XM Satellite Radio
NOTICE
To listen to a satellite radio broadcast
in the vehicle, a subscription to the XM
Satellite Radio service is necessary.
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE
It is necessary to enter into a separate
service agreement with XM Satellite
Radio in order to receive satellite
broadcast programming in the vehicle.
Additional activation and service subscription fees apply that are not included in the purchase price of the vehicle
and digital satellite tuner.
 For complete information on subscription rates and terms, or to subscribe to
XM Satellite Radio:
U.S.A.
Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call
1-800-967-2346.
Canada
Refer to www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-209-0079.
93
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
An XM Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate
subscription. Availability is limited to
the 48 contiguous U.S. states and
some Canadian provinces.
● XM Radio Services ⎯ Legal Disclaimers
and Warnings
• Fees and Taxes ⎯ Subscription fee,
taxes, one time activation fee, and
other fees may apply. Subscription fee
is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change.
Subscriptions subject to Customer
Agreement available at
www.siriusxm.com. (U.S.A.) or
www.xmradio.ca (Canada) XM service
only available in the 48 contiguous
United States and Canada.
Explicit Language Notice ⎯ Channels
with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL” preceding the channel name. Channel blocking is
available for XM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying XM at;
U.S.A. Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or calling
1-800-967-2346
Canadian Customers:
Visit www.xmradio.ca or calling
1-877-209-0079
2. RADIO OPERATION
NOTICE
● It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise make available any
technology or software incorporated in
receivers compatible with the XM
Satellite Radio System or that support
the XM website, the Online Service or
any of its content. Furthermore, the
AMBE® voice compression software
included in this product is protected by
intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets
of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.
● Note: this applies to XM receivers only
and not XM Ready devices.
INFORMATION
● XM Radio Services⎯Descriptions
• Radio and Entertainment
XM offers more than 170 satellite radio
channels of commercial-free music
and premier sports, news, talk, and
entertainment. XM is broadcast via satellites to millions of listeners across the
continental United States. XM subscribers listen to XM on satellite radio
receivers for the car, home, and portable use. More information about XM is
available online at www.siriusxm.com
(U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada).
INFORMATION
● XM
Radio
Services⎯Subscription
Instructions
• For XM Services requiring a subscription (such as XM Radio, and some
Infotainment & data services), the following paragraph shall be included.
Required XM Radio and some Infotainment & data services monthly subscriptions sold separately after trial
period. Subscription fee is consumer
only. All fees and programming subject
to change. Subscriptions are subject to
the Customer Agreement available at
www.siriusxm.com. XM service only
available in the 48 contiguous United
States.  2011 Sirius XM Radio Inc.
Sirius, XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc. All other marks, channel
names and logos are the property of
their respective owners.
For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe or extend subscription after complimentary trial
period; more information is available
at:
USA Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or call
1-800-967-2346
94
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. RADIO OPERATION
DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID
INFORMATION
Each XM tuner is identified with a
unique radio ID. The radio ID is required when activating an XM service
or when reporting a problem.
 If “Ch 000” is selected using the “TUNE/
SCROLL” knob, the ID code, which is 8
alphanumeric characters, will be displayed. If another channel is selected, the
ID code will no longer be displayed. The
channel (000) alternates between displaying the radio ID and the specific radio
code.
PRESETTING A CHANNEL
SATELLITE TUNER
TECHNOLOGY NOTICE
Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are
awarded Type Approval Certificates
from XM Satellite Radio Inc. as proof of
compatibility with the services offered
by XM Satellite Radio.
1
2
Tune in the desired channel.
Select “(add new)”.
INFORMATION
● Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services
(Music and Talk) and the accompanying
Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
 To change the preset channel to a different one, select and hold the preset station/
channel.
3
Select “Yes” on the confirmation
screen.
4
Select “OK” after setting the new preset channel.
95
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
● XM Satellite Radio is solely responsible
for the quality, availability and content of
the satellite radio services provided,
which are subject to the terms and conditions of the XM Satellite Radio customer service agreement.
● Customers should have their radio ID
ready; the radio ID can be found by tuning to “Ch 000” on the radio. For details,
see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID”
below.
● All fees and programming are the
responsibility of XM Satellite Radio and
are subject to change.
2. RADIO OPERATION
SELECTING A CHANNEL
FROM THE LIST
1
2
3
Select “Channel List”.
Select the desired program genre.
Select the desired channel and select
“OK”.
96
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. RADIO OPERATION
IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS
When problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action.
Message
“Ch Unauthorized”
The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna
cable is attached securely.
A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified dealer for assistance.
You have not subscribed to XM Satellite Radio. The radio is being
updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM Satellite Radio
for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can
choose “Ch 000” and all free-to-air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about
2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “Ch 001”.
If it does not change automatically, select another channel. To listen
to the premium channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.
“No Signal”
The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.
“Loading”
The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit
has received the information.
“Channel Off Air”
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.
-----
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with
the channel at that time. No action is required.
“Chan Unavailable”
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2
seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “Ch 001”.
If it does not change automatically, select another channel.
INFORMATION
● Contact the XM Listener Care Center at 1-800-967-2346 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-209-0079
(Canada).
97
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
AUDIO SYSTEM
“Check Antenna”
3
Explanation
2. RADIO OPERATION
3. INTERNET RADIO*
LISTENING TO INTERNET
RADIO
INFORMATION
● Other applications can be activated
while listening to internet radio.
● If an iPhone is connected via Bluetooth®
and USB at the same time, system operation may become unstable. For known
phone compatibility information, refer to
http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
● Some parts of applications can be
adjusted using the switches on the
steering wheel.
● For additional information, refer to
http://www.toyota.com/entune/ or call
1-800-331-4331.
One of Entune App Suite features is
the ability to listen to internet radio. In
order to use this service, a compatible
phone and the system needs to be set
up. For details: →P.341
1
Select the internet radio application.
 The internet radio application screen is
displayed.
 Perform operations according to the displayed application screen.
 For the instrument panel operation
method: →P.75
 If a compatible phone is already registered, it will be connected automatically.
*: Entune Premium Audio
98
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
1. CD*
OVERVIEW
The CD operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
Insert a disc. (→P.76)
Select “CD” on the “Select Audio Source” screen. (→P.75)
3
■CONTROL SCREEN
AUDIO SYSTEM
*: Entune Audio Plus
99
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
■CONTROL PANEL
100
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
No.
Function
• Displays cover art
• Select to display a track/file list.
Select to display the audio source selection screen.
Select to display the sound setting screen.
3
Select to play/pause.
AUDIO SYSTEM
Shows progress
Select to set repeat playback.
Select to set random playback.
• Audio CD: Select to display a track list.
• MP3/WMA/AAC disc: Select to display a folder list.
To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.
Disc slot
• Turn to select a track/file.
• Turn to move up/down the list. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the
list screens by pressing it.
• Press to select a track/file.
• Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Press to play/pause.
Press to select an audio mode.
• Turn to adjust volume.
• Press to turn the audio system on/off.
• Press and hold to restart the audio system.
Press to eject a disc.
INFORMATION
● If a disc contains CD-DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC files, only the CD-DA files can be
played back.
● If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed. Up to 32
characters can be displayed.
● If the disc contains no CD-TEXT, only the track number would be displayed on the
screen.
101
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
PLAYING AN AUDIO CD
PLAYING AN MP3/WMA/AAC
DISC
REPEATING
REPEATING
The track currently being listened to
can be repeated.
1
Select the repeat button to change on/
off.
The file currently being listened to can
be repeated.
1
Select the repeat button to change on/
off.
RANDOM ORDER
RANDOM ORDER
Tracks can be automatically and randomly selected.
1
Select the random button to change
on/off.
Files can be automatically and randomly selected.
1
Select the random button to change
on/off.
102
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
2. USB MEMORY
OVERVIEW
The USB memory operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
Connect a USB memory. (→P.77)
Select “USB (DEVICE NAME)” on the “Select Audio Source” screen. (→P.75)
3
■CONTROL SCREEN
AUDIO SYSTEM
103
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
■CONTROL PANEL
Entune Audio Plus
Entune Premium Audio
104
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
No.
Function
Select to display the audio source selection screen.
Select to display the sound setting screen.
Select to play/pause.
3
Shows progress
AUDIO SYSTEM
Select to set repeat playback.
Select to set random playback.
Select to display the play mode selection screen.
To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.
• Displays cover art
• Select to display file/track list.
• Turn to select a file/track.
• Turn to move up/down the list. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the
list screens by pressing it.
• Press to select a file/track.
• Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
*
Press to play/pause.
Press to select an audio mode.
• Turn to adjust volume.
• Press to turn the audio system on/off.
• Press and hold to restart the audio system.
*: Entune Audio Plus
105
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
WARNING
● Do not operate the player’s controls or connect the USB memory while driving.
NOTICE
● Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the
vehicle may damage the portable player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is connected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its
terminal.
INFORMATION
● If tag information exists, the file names will be changed to track names.
106
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
PLAYING A USB AUDIO
REPEATING
The file/track currently being listened
to can be repeated.
1
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
Select the repeat button to change on/
off.
RANDOM ORDER
Files/tracks can be automatically and
randomly selected.
1
Select the random button to change
on/off.
107
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
3. iPod
OVERVIEW
The iPod operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
Connect an iPod. (→P.77)
Select “iPod (DEVICE NAME)” on the “Select Audio Source” screen. (→P.75)
When the iPod connected to the system includes iPod video, the system can only
output the sound by selecting the browse screen. (→P.112)
■CONTROL SCREEN
108
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
■CONTROL PANEL
Entune Audio Plus
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
Entune Premium Audio
109
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
No.
Function
• Displays cover art
• Select to display a track list.
Select to display the audio source selection screen.
Select to display the sound setting screen.
Select to play/pause.
Shows progress
Select to set repeat playback.
Select to set random playback.
Select to display the play mode selection screen.
To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.
• Turn to select a track.
• Turn to move up/down the list. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the
list screens by pressing it.
• Press to select a track.
• Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
*
Press to play/pause.
Press to select an audio mode.
• Turn to adjust volume.
• Press to turn the audio system on/off.
• Press and hold to restart the audio system.
*: Entune Audio Plus
WARNING
● Do not operate the player’s controls or connect the iPod while driving.
NOTICE
● Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the
vehicle may damage the portable player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is connected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its
terminal.
110
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
INFORMATION
111
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
● When an iPod is connected using a genuine iPod cable, the iPod starts charging its battery.
● Depending on the iPod, the video sound may not be able to be heard.
● Depending on the iPod and the songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed. This
function can be changed to on/off. (→P.124) It may take time to display iPod cover art,
and the iPod may not be operated while the cover art display is in process.
● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will
resume playing from the same point it was last used.
● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be
available.
● Files/tracks selected by operating a connected iPod may not be recognized or displayed
properly.
● If an iPhone is connected via Bluetooth® and USB at the same time, system operation
may become unstable.
For known phone compatibility information, refer to http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
3. MEDIA OPERATION
iPod AUDIO
iPod VIDEO
To change to iPod video mode, select
“Browse” on the iPod audio screen,
then select the “Videos” tab and select the desired video file.
REPEATING
The track currently being listened to
can be repeated.
1
Select the repeat button to change on/
off.
The system can only output the iPod
video sound.
RANDOM ORDER
Tracks can be automatically and randomly selected.
1
Select the shuffle button to change on/
off.
112
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
4. Bluetooth® AUDIO
The Bluetooth® audio system enables users to enjoy listening to music that is
played on a portable player on the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of playing
portable audio music without cables. If your device does not support Bluetooth®,
the Bluetooth® audio system will not function.
3
OVERVIEW
Audio” on the “Select Audio Source” screen. (→P.75)
Depending on the type of portable player connected, some functions may not be
available and/or the screen may look differently than shown in this manual.
■CONTROL SCREEN
113
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
AUDIO SYSTEM
Select “
3. MEDIA OPERATION
■CONTROL PANEL
Entune Audio Plus
Entune Premium Audio
114
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
No.
Function
Select to display the audio source selection screen.
Displays Bluetooth® device condition.
Select to display the sound settings screen.
3
Select to play/pause.
AUDIO SYSTEM
Shows progress
Select to set repeat playback.
Select to set random playback.
Select to display the playlist screen.
To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.
Select to display the portable device connection screen.
• Displays cover art
• Select to display a track list.
• Turn to select a track.
• Turn to move up/down the list. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the
list screens by pressing it.
• Press to select a track.
• Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
*
Press to play/pause.
Press to select an audio mode.
• Turn to adjust volume.
• Press to turn the audio system on/off.
• Press and hold to restart the audio system.
*: Entune Audio Plus
115
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
WARNING
● Do not operate the player’s controls or connect to the Bluetooth® audio system while driving.
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter
defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the
Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.
● Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than
implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or
implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could
have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.
NOTICE
● Do not leave your portable player in the vehicle. In particular, high temperatures inside
the vehicle may damage the portable player.
116
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
INFORMATION
● Depending on the Bluetooth® device that is connected to the system, the music may start
playing when selecting
selecting
while it is paused. Conversely, the music may pause when
while it is playing.
● In the following conditions, the system may not function:
3
• The Bluetooth® device is turned off.
• The Bluetooth® device has a low battery.
● It may take time to connect the phone when Bluetooth® audio is being played.
● For operating the portable player, see the instruction manual that comes with it.
● If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected due to poor reception from the Bluetooth® network when the engine <power> switch is in the following, the system will automatically
reconnect to the portable player.
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine <power> switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON>
mode.
● If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected on purpose, such as it was turned off, this does
not happen. Reconnect the portable player manually.
● Bluetooth® device information is registered when the Bluetooth® device is connected to
the Bluetooth® audio system. When selling or disposing of the vehicle, remove the
Bluetooth® audio information from the system. (→P.62)
117
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
AUDIO SYSTEM
• The Bluetooth® device is not connected.
3. MEDIA OPERATION
CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE
LISTENING TO Bluetooth®
AUDIO
To use the Bluetooth® audio system, it
is necessary to register a Bluetooth®
device with the system.
REPEATING
The track currently being listened to
can be repeated.
Registering an additional device
1
Select
“Select
Device”
on
the
1
Bluetooth® audio control screen.
2
For more information: →P.49
RANDOM ORDER
Selecting a registered device
1
Select
“Select
Device”
on
Bluetooth® audio control screen.
2
For more information: →P.51
Select the repeat button to change on/
off.
the
Tracks can be automatically and randomly selected.
1
Select the random button to change
on/off.
118
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
5. AUX
OVERVIEW
Select “AUX” on the “Select Audio Source” screen. (→P.75)
■CONTROL SCREEN
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
■CONTROL PANEL
Entune Audio Plus
119
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. MEDIA OPERATION
Entune Premium Audio
No.
Function
Select to display the audio source selection screen.
Select to display the sound setting screen.
*
Press to turn mute on/off.
Press to select an audio mode.
• Turn to adjust volume.
• Press to turn the audio system on/off.
• Press and hold to restart the audio system.
*: Entune Audio Plus
WARNING
● Do not connect portable audio device or operate the controls while driving.
NOTICE
● Do not leave portable audio device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable audio device while it
is connected as this may damage the portable audio device or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable audio device
or its terminal.
120
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
4. AUDIO REMOTE CONTROLS
1. STEERING SWITCHES
Some parts of the audio system can be adjusted using the switches on the steering
wheel.
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
No.
Switch
Volume control switch
“
” switch
“MODE/HOLD” switch
Volume control switch
Mode
All
Operation
Function
Press
Volume up/down
Press and hold
Volume up/down continuously
121
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
4. AUDIO REMOTE CONTROLS
“
” switch
Mode
Operation
Function
Press
Preset station/channel up/down
Press and hold
Seek up/down continuously while the switch is being
pressed
Press
Preset channel up/down
Press and hold
Seek up/down continuously while the switch is being
pressed
Audio CD*2,
MP3/WMA/AAC
Press
Track/file up/down
disc*2, USB,
iPod, BT audio
Press and hold
Fast track/file up/down
AM/FM Radio
XM*1
*1: If equipped
*2: Entune Audio Plus
122
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
4. AUDIO REMOTE CONTROLS
“MODE/HOLD” switch
Mode
Operation
Function
Press
Change audio modes
XM* , AUX
Press and hold
Mute (Press and hold again to resume the sound.)
Audio CD*2/
MP3/WMA/
Press
Change audio modes
Press and hold
Pause (Press and hold again to resume the playmode.)
AM, FM,
1
*1: If equipped
*2: Entune Audio Plus
INFORMATION
● In the APPS mode, some operation may be done on the screen depend on the selected
APPS.
123
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
AUDIO SYSTEM
AAC disc*2,
USB, iPod,
BT audio,
APPS
3
5. SETUP
1. AUDIO SETTINGS
Detailed audio settings can be programmed.
1
AUDIO SETTINGS SCREEN
Press the “APPS” button.
Entune Audio Plus
No.
Entune Premium Audio
*
2
3
4
Function
Page
Select to change the number of preset radio stations/channels displayed
on the screen.
125
Select to set cover art settings on/off.
⎯
Select to set automatic
sound levelizer.
77
Select to enable cache radio.
⎯
Select to reset all setup
items.
⎯
*: Entune Premium Audio
Select “Setup”.
Select “Audio”.
Select the items to be set.
124
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
5. SETUP
SETTING THE NUMBER OF
RADIO PRESETS
1
Display the “Audio Settings” screen.
(→P.124)
2
3
Select “Number of Radio Presets”.
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
Select the button with the desired number to be displayed.
125
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO SYSTEM
1. OPERATING INFORMATION
NOTICE
● To avoid damage to the audio system:
• Be careful not to spill beverages over
the audio system.
• Do not put anything other than an
appropriate disc into the disc slot.
INFORMATION
● The use of a cellular phone inside or
near the vehicle may cause a noise from
the speakers of the audio system which
you are listening to. However, this does
not indicate a malfunction.
RADIO
Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with
the radio — it is just the normal result
of conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with FM reception.
Power lines or phone wires can interfere with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited range. The
farther the vehicle is from a station, the
weaker its signal will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly
as the vehicle moves.
FM
Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the
effective range of FM is about 25 miles (40
km). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with
the distance from the radio transmitter.
They are often accompanied by distortion.
Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, making it possible for 2 signals to reach the vehicle’s antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other
out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of
reception.
Static and fluttering: These occur when
signals are blocked by buildings, trees or
other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping: If the FM signal being
listened to is interrupted or weakened, and
there is another strong station nearby on
the FM band, the radio may tune in the
second station until the original signal can
be picked up again.
Here, some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a
problem with the radio are described.
126
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO SYSTEM
AM
CD PLAYER AND DISC
XM
 Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier,
especially metal objects, may adversely
affect the reception of XM Satellite Radio.
 Alternation or modifications carried out
without appropriate authorization may
invalidate the user’s right to operate the
equipment.
 This CD player is intended for use with 4.7
in. (12 cm). discs only.
 Extremely high temperatures can keep the
CD player from working. On hot days, use
the air conditioning system to cool the
inside of the vehicle before using the
player.
 Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
make the CD player skip.
 If moisture gets into the CD player, the
discs may not be able to be played.
Remove the discs from the player and
wait until it dries.
WARNING
● CD players use an invisible laser beam
which could cause hazardous radiation
exposure if directed outside the unit. Be
sure to operate the player correctly.
Audio CDs
 Use only discs marked as shown above.
The following products may not be playable on your player:
• SACD
• dts CD
• Copy-protected CD
• Video CD
127
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by
the upper atmosphere — especially at
night. These reflected signals can interfere
with those received directly from the radio
station, causing the radio station to sound
alternately strong and weak.
Station interference: When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each
other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.
Static: AM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high
tension power lines, lightening or electrical
motors. This results in static.
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO SYSTEM
Special shaped discs
Transparent/translucent discs
NOTICE
● Do not use special shaped, transparent/
translucent, low quality or labeled discs
such as those shown in the illustrations.
The use of such discs may damage the
player, or it may be impossible to eject
the disc.
● This system is not designed for use of
Dual Discs. Do not use Dual Discs
because they may cause damage to the
player.
● Do not use discs with a protection ring.
The use of such discs may damage the
player, or it may be impossible to eject
the disc.
● Do not use printable discs. The use of
such discs may damage the player, or it
may be impossible to eject the disc.
Low quality discs
Correct
Labeled discs
Wrong
 Handle discs carefully, especially when
inserting them. Hold them on the edge
and do not bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny
side.
 Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or other
disc damage could cause the player to
skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To
see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the
light.)
 Remove discs from the players when not
in use. Store them in their plastic cases
away from moisture, heat and direct sunlight.
128
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO SYSTEM
iPod
3
CD-R/RW DISCS
 CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been
subject to the “finalizing process” (a process that allows discs to be played on a
conventional CD player) cannot be
played.
 It may not be possible to play CD-R/CDRW discs recorded on a music CD
recorder or a personal computer because
of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on
the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the
lens of the unit.
 It may not be possible to play discs
recorded on a personal computer depending on the application settings and the
environment. Record with the correct format. (For details, contact the appropriate
application manufacturers of the applications.)
 CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged by
direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures or other storage conditions. The unit
may be unable to play some damaged
discs.
 If you insert a CD-RW disc into the player,
playback will begin more slowly than with
a conventional CD or CD-R disc.
 Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
played using the DDCD (Double Density
CD) system.
 “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone”
mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to
iPod or iPhone respectively, and has been
certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
 Apple is not responsible for the operation
of this device or its compliance with safety
and regulatory standards. Please note
that the use of this accessory with iPod or
iPhone may affect wireless performance.
 iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.
129
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
AUDIO SYSTEM
To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lintfree cloth that has been dampened with
water. Wipe in a straight line from the center to the edge of the disc (not in circles).
Dry it with another soft, lint-free cloth. Do
not use a conventional record cleaner or
anti-static device.
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO SYSTEM
COMPATIBLE MODELS
FILE INFORMATION
The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod
classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devices can be used with this system.
Made for
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
iPod touch (5th generation)*
iPod touch (4th generation)
iPod touch (3rd generation)
iPod touch (2nd generation)
iPod touch (1st generation)
iPod classic
iPod with video
iPod nano (7th generation)*
iPod nano (6th generation)*
iPod nano (5th generation)
iPod nano (4th generation)
iPod nano (3rd generation)
iPod nano (2nd generation)*
iPod nano (1st generation)*
iPhone 5s*
iPhone 5c*
iPhone 5*
iPhone 4S
iPhone 4
iPhone 3GS
iPhone 3G
iPhone
■COMPATIBLE USB DEVICES
USB communication
formats
USB 2.0 HS (480
Mbps) and FS
(12 Mbps)
File formats
FAT 16/32
Correspondence class
Mass
class
■COMPATIBLE
storage
COMPRESSED
FILES
Item
Compatible
file format
*: iPod video not supported
USB
DISC
MP3/WMA/AAC
Folders in the
device
Maximum
3000
Maximum192
Files in the
device
Maximum
9999
Maximum255
Files per
folder
Maximum
255
⎯
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models
might be incompatible with this system.
130
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO SYSTEM
■CORRESPONDING
SAMPLING
FREQUENCY
File type
Frequency (kHz)
32/44.1/48
MP3 files:
MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3
16/22.05/24
WMA files:
Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2)
32/44.1/48
AAC files:
MPEG4/AAC-LC
11.025/12/16/
22.05/24/32/
44.1/48
■CORRESPONDING BIT RATES
File type
Bit rate (kbps)
MP3 files:
MPEG 1 LAYER 3
32 - 320
MP3 files:
MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3
8 - 160
WMA files: Ver. 7, 8
CBR 48 - 192
WMA files:
Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2)
CBR 48 - 320
AAC files:
MPEG4/AAC-LC
16 - 320
(Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compatible)
131
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
MP3 files:
MPEG 1 LAYER 3
 MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), WMA
(Windows Media Audio) and AAC
(Advanced Audio Coding) are audio compression standards.
 This system can play MP3/WMA/AAC files
on CD-R, CD-RW discs and USB memory.
 When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file, add
an appropriate file extension (.mp3/.wma/
.m4a).
 This system plays back files with .mp3/
.wma/.m4a file extensions as MP3/WMA/
AAC files respectively. To prevent noise
and playback errors, use the appropriate
file extension.
 WMA/AAC files can contain a WMA/AAC
tag that is used in the same way as an ID3
tag. WMA/AAC tags carry information
such as track title and artist name.
 The emphasis function is available only
when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at
32, 44.1 and 48 kHz.
 This system can play back AAC files
encoded by iTunes.
 The MP3/WMA player does not play back
MP3/WMA files from discs recorded using
packet write data transfer (UDF format).
Discs should be recorded using “pre-mastering” software rather than packet-write
software.
 MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO formats are not compatible with the audio
player.
 The player is compatible with VBR (Variable Bit Rate).
 When playing back files recorded as VBR
(Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time will
not be correctly displayed if the fast forward or reverse operations are used.
 It is not possible to check folders that do
not include MP3/WMA/AAC files.
 The order changes depending on the personal computer and MP3/WMA/AAC
encoding software you use.
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO SYSTEM
Entune Audio Plus
Entune Premium Audio
 This system can play disc recordings compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2
and with the Romeo and Joliet file system.
 This system can play only the first session
when using multi-session compatible CDs.
 MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 Tag
Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3 formats. This system cannot display disc
title, track title and artist name in other formats.
 The sound quality of MP3/WMA files generally improves with higher bit rates. In
order to achieve a reasonable level of
sound quality, discs recorded with a bit
rate of at least 128 kbps are recommended.
 M3u playlists are not compatible with the
audio player.
 MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up to 8 levels deep can be played. However, the
start of playback may be delayed when
using discs containing numerous levels of
folders. For this reason, we recommend
creating discs with no more than 2 levels
of folders.
 MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 Tag
Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3 formats. This system cannot display album
title, track title and artist name in other formats.
 The sound quality of MP3/WMA files generally improves with higher bit rates. In
order to achieve a reasonable level of
sound quality, files recorded with a bit rate
of at least 128 kbps are recommended.
 MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up to 8 levels deep can be played.
Media device
001.mp3
002.wma
Folder 1
003.mp3
Folder 2
004.mp3
005.wma
Folder 3
006.aac
001.mp3
002.wma
Folder 1
003.mp3
Folder 2
004.mp3
005.wma
Folder 3
006.m4a
 The play order of the compact disc with
the structure shown above is as follows:
001.mp3
002.wma . . .
006.m4a
132
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO SYSTEM
ISO 9660 FORMAT
TERMS
PACKET WRITE
 This is a general term that describes the
process of writing data on-demand to CDR, etc., in the same way that data is written to floppy or hard discs.
 This is a method of embedding trackrelated information in an MP3 file. This
embedded information can include the
track number, track title, the artist’s name,
the album title, the music genre, the year
of production, comments, cover art and
other data. The contents can be freely
edited using software with ID3 tag editing
functions. Although the tags are restricted
to a number of characters, the information
can be viewed when the track is played
back.
MP3
 MP3 is an audio compression standard
determined by a working group (MPEG) of
the ISO (International Standard Organization). MP3 compresses audio data to
about 1/10 the size of that on conventional
discs.
WMA TAG
 WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is
used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA
tags carry information such as track title
and artist name.
133
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
ID3 TAG
 This is the international standard for the
formatting of CD-ROM folders and files.
For the ISO 9660 format, there are 2 levels of regulations.
 Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (8
character file names, with a 3 character
file extension. File names must be composed of one-byte capital letters and numbers. The “_” symbol may also be
included.)
 Level 2: The file name can have up to 31
characters (including the separation mark
“.” and file extension). Each folder must
contain fewer than 8 hierarchies.
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO SYSTEM
WMA
 WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio
compression
format
developed
by
Microsoft®. It compresses files into a size
smaller than that of MP3 files. The decoding formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8 and
9.
 This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution
of such technology outside of this product
is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary
and third parties.
AAC
 AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding
and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and
MPEG4.
134
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO SYSTEM
ERROR MESSAGES
Mode
USB
iPod
Explanation
“No music files found.”
This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are
included in the disc.
“Check disc”
It indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or it
was inserted upside down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly.
It indicates a disc which is not playable is inserted.
“DISC Error”
There is a trouble inside the system.
Eject the disc.
“Connection error. Please
consult your Owner’s
Manual for instructions on
how to connect the USB
device.”
This indicates a problem in the USB memory or
its connection.
“There are no files available for playback. Please
add compatible files to
your USB device.”
This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are
included in the USB memory.
“Connection error. Please
consult your Owner’s
Manual for instructions on
how to connect the iPod.”
This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.
“There are no songs available for playback. Please
add compatible files to
your iPod.”
This indicates that there is no music data in the
iPod.
“Please check the iPod
firmware version.”
This indicates that the software version is not
compatible. Perform the iPod firmware updates
and try again.
“iPod authorization unsuccessful.”
This indicates that it failed to authorize the iPod.
Please check your iPod.
*: Entune Audio Plus
135
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3
AUDIO SYSTEM
CD*
Message
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO SYSTEM
INFORMATION
● If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
136
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
4
1
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
2
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION
3
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM...... 138
4
1
USING THE VOICE COMMAND
SYSTEM............................................ 138
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION ..................................... 139
2. CASUAL SPEECH
RECOGNIZATION..................... 145
3. COMMAND LIST ......................... 146
2
MOBILE ASSISTANT
OPERATION
5
6
7
8
1. MOBILE ASSISTANT.................. 149
9
137
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
The voice command system enables
the audio, hands-free systems, etc. to
be operated using voice commands.
MICROPHONE
Refer to the command list for samples
of voice commands. (→P.146)
USING THE VOICE
COMMAND SYSTEM
STEERING SWITCH
 It is unnecessary to speak directly into the
microphone when giving a command.
Talk switch
 Press the talk switch to start the voice
command system.
 To cancel voice recognition, press and
hold the talk switch.
138
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
INFORMATION
The voice command system is operated by selecting a tab corresponding to
each function. The tabs are found on
the upper part of the screen.
1
2
Press the talk switch.
4
Select “OK”.
 To train voice recognition and to display
the tutorial. (→P.141)
 To prevent the screen from being displayed again, select “Do Not Tell Me
Again”.
139
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
● The voice command system can be
operated while guidance is being spoken, when “Voice Prompt Interrupt”
(→P.63) is set to on. (It is not necessary
to wait for the confirmation beep before
speaking a command.)
● Voice commands may not be recognized
if:
• Spoken too quickly.
• Spoken at a low or high volume.
• The roof or windows are open.
• Passengers are talking while voice
commands are spoken.
• The air conditioning speed is set high.
• The air conditioning vents are turned
towards the microphone.
● In the following conditions, the system
may not recognize the command properly and using voice commands may not
be possible:
• The command is incorrect or unclear.
Note that certain words, accents or
speech patterns may be difficult for the
system to recognize.
• There is excessive background noise,
such as wind noise.
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
3
Say the tab selection command or select the desired tab.
 Selecting “Help” or saying “Help”
prompts voice guidance to offer examples of commands and operation methods.
4
Say the command displayed on the
screen.
 Commands related with each function are
displayed on the screen of the each function tab. Some commonly used commands are displayed on the screen of the
function tab.
 Registered POIs, registered names in the
contacts list etc., can be said in the place
of the “<>” next to the commands.
(→P.146)
For example: Say “Find nearby dining”,
“Call John smith” etc.
 If a desired outcome is not shown, or if no
selections are available, perform one of
the following to return to the previous
screen:
• Say “Go back”.
• Select “Go Back”.
 To cancel voice recognition, select “Cancel”, or press and hold the talk switch.
INFORMATION
● If the system does not respond or the
confirmation screen does not disappear,
press the talk switch and try again.
● “Voice Recognition Prompts” can be set
on the “Voice Settings” screen. (→P.63)
● Some voice guidance can be canceled
by setting voice prompts to off. Use this
setting when it is desirable to say a command immediately after pressing the talk
switch and hearing a beep.
140
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
■DISPLAYING THE “Voice Settings”
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
LAUNCH Entune App Suite
APPLICATION*
SCREENS
1
2
Press the talk switch.
Say “Launch <application name>”.
 Entune App Suite application screen is
displayed.
DISPLAYING THE TRAIN VOICE
RECOGNITION AND TUTORIAL
SCREENS
1
2
Press the talk switch.
Select the desired item to be set.
No.
Function
1
2
3
Press the talk switch.
Say “Enter an address”.
Say “<house number, street name,
city name, State>” continuously.
 A confirmation screen will be displayed
showing the recognition results. If multiple
matching items are found, a selection
screen will be displayed. Say “<number>” or select the number.
 Some areas cannot be recognized by the
voice recognition system.
 For information regarding the state/
province setting to perform a destination
search by address: →P.284
Select to train voice recognition.
4
Select to display the voice recognition tutorial.
 After this, follow the voice guidance and
search for a destination route by voice
command operation.
Say “Go directly”.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
141
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
4
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
PERFORMING A DESTINATION
SEARCH BY ADDRESS
(ENGLISH ONLY)*
 Selecting “Voice Settings” can be displayed the “Voice Settings” screen.
(→P.63)
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
SEARCH FOR A SONG
INFORMATION
● The voice command recognition is
designed to recognize the main body of
the official street name.
For example: if the official street name is
“East Main Street”, the voice command
recognition will recognize “Main”.
● Say the desired number, cardinal direction etc. in the place of the “<>”.
For example: Say “West 555”.
● Inputting the house number can be
skipped.
● Even if the state set using voice recognition is different from the set state in the
“Address” screen (which was set when a
destination was set manually), the set
state in the “Address” screen will not
change. (→P.285)
● The house number voice recognition
conditions are outlined below:
• Numerals: 10 digits or less
• Numerals and cardinal direction or a
hyphen and numerals: A total of 9
digits or less (Do not say “and”.)
• Cardinal direction or a hyphen and
numerals: A total of 9 digits or less
(Do not say “and”.)
• Numerals are recognized as single
digits only.
• The cardinal direction and hyphens
are only recognized once.
• The following cardinal directions can
be recognized: North, East, West and
South.
1
2
Press the talk switch.
Say “Play song <name>”.
 A confirmation screen will be displayed
showing the recognition results. If multiple
matching items are found, a selection
screen will be displayed. Say “<number>” or select the number.
 The system starts playing music and the
song lists are displayed.
INFORMATION
● The Gracenote database is only compatible with the USB or iPod mode.
● A USB memory or iPod must be connected to enable track searching and
playback. (→P.103, 108)
● When a USB memory or iPod is connected, recognition data is created so
tracks can be searched using voice
commands.
● Recognition data is updated under the
following conditions:
• When the USB memory or iPod data
has changed.
• When the voice recognition language
is changed. (→P.56)
● While the recognition data is being created or being updated, a track search
cannot be performed using a voice command.
142
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
CALL NAME
1
2
INFORMATION
Press the talk switch.
Say “Call
types>”.
<contacts>
<phone
 A confirmation screen will be displayed
showing the recognition results. If multiple
matching items are found, a selection
screen will be displayed. Say “<number>” or select the number.
143
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
4
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
● In the same manner as it is displayed on
the screen, “Call <contacts> <phone
types>”, after saying “Call a contact”
say the name, or the name and type of
phone, of a contact.
For example: “Call a contact”, “John
Smith” or “Call a contact”, “Mary
Davis”, “Mobile”
● There are 4 types of phones: Home,
Mobile, Work and Other.
● Short or abbreviated names in the contacts list may not be recognized. Change
names in the contacts list to full names.
● Sometimes a voice recognition result
confirmation screen will be displayed.
After confirming the result, say “Yes” or
“No”.
● When the system recognizes multiple
names from the contacts list, a name
candidate list will be displayed on the
screen. If the desired name is not displayed on the top of the screen, say or
select the number of the name from the
candidate list (number 1, number 2, etc.)
to select a name from the candidate list.
● When a contact has multiple phone
numbers registered in the contacts list, a
candidate list will be displayed. If the
desired phone number is not displayed
on the top of the screen, say or select
the number of the desired phone number from the candidate list (number 1,
number 2, etc.) to select a phone number from the candidate list.
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
3
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
DIAL NUMBER
1
2
Press the talk switch.
Say “Call” or press the
the steering wheel.
switch on
 When the system recognizes multiple
phone numbers, a phone number candidate list will be displayed on the screen.
Say the phone number.
 In the same manner as it is displayed on
the screen, “Dial <number>”, after saying
“Dial a number” say the phone number.
 Say the phone number one digit at a time.
For example, if the phone number is
2345678:
Say “two three four five six seven
eight”
Do not say “twenty three forty five sixty
seven eight”
switch on the steerPressing the
ing wheel makes a call to the top entry
on the list. If the desired phone number
is not displayed on the top of the screen,
say the number of the desired phone
number from the candidate list to select
a phone number from the candidate list.
Calling to the following phone numbers
• 3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611)
• 7 digit numbers (Local phone numbers)
• 10 digit numbers (Area code + Local
phone number)
• 11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area code +
Local phone number)
 As the system cannot recognize additional
numbers, say the complete number without stopping.
Calling to other phone numbers
144
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
2. CASUAL SPEECH RECOGNIZATION
Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system enables
recognition of a command when spoken naturally. However, the system
cannot recognize every variation of
each command. In some situations, it
is possible to omit the command for the
procedure and directly state the desired operation. Not all voice commands are displayed in the function
menu.
Command
Expression examples
“Go Home”*
Navigate to my house.
Take me home.
“Enter an
Address”*
I need directions to an
address.
Give me a street.
“Find Nearby
<POI category>”*
Search for a <Restaurants> around here.
Find a <Restaurants>
nearby.
“Call
<name>
<type>”
Get
me
<Robert
Brown>.
Call <contacts> <phonetypes>.
“Dial <number>”
Call <911>.
“Play Artist
<name>”
Play the artist <name>.
I want to hear the band
<name>.
“Play Album
<name>”
Play album <name>.
Play album <albums>.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
145
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
4
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
INFORMATION
● If the command cannot be recognized
completely, the command input screen
will be displayed. (Search results will be
shown based on the part of the command that was recognized.)
EXPRESSION EXAMPLES FOR
EACH FUNCTION
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
3. COMMAND LIST
Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below.
 Frequently used commands are listed in the following tables.
 For devices that are not installed in the vehicle, the related commands will not be displayed in the screen. Also, according to conditions, other commands may not be displayed in the screen.
 The functions available may vary according to the system installed.
 Voice recognition language can be changed. (→P.56)
Basic
Command
Action
“Help with <function name*>”
Prompts voice guidance to offer examples of commands
or operation methods
“Go Back”
Returns to the previous screen
“Number one/two/three/four/five”
Selects the number on the list screen
“Next Page”
Displays the next page
“Previous Page”
Displays the previous page
“Go to <tab>”
Displays the command list of the selected tab
*: For example; “Music”, “Phone”, etc.
Apps*
When the voice recognition language is set to English.
Command
“Launch <apps>”
Action
Activates the Entune App Suite application
*: Entune Premium Audio only
146
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
Navigation*1
Command
Action
“Find Nearby <POI category>”
Displays a list of <POI category*2> near the current position
“Enter an Address”
Enables setting a destination by saying the address
“Go Home”
Displays the route to home
“Cancel Route”
Stops the route guidance
“Web search”
Set the web search engine.
4
Phone
Command
Action
“Redial”
Places a call to the phone number of the latest outgoing
call
“Call Back”
Places a call to the phone number of latest incoming call
“Show Recent Calls”
Displays the call history screen
“Dial <phone number>”
Places a call to the said phone number
“Call <contacts> <phonetypes>”
Place a call to the said phone type of the contact from the
phone book
Audio
Command
Action
“Play Playlist <name>”
Plays tracks from the selected playlist
“Play Artist <name>”
Plays tracks from the selected artist
“Play Song <name>”
Plays the selected track
“Play Album <name>”
Plays tracks from the selected album
147
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
*1: Entune Premium Audio only
*2: For example; “Gas stations”, “Restaurants”, etc.
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
Info*
Command
Action
“Show Forecast”
Displays weather information
“Show Traffic”
Displays traffic information
*: Available models and available country and areas (→P.152, 154)
148
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION
1. MOBILE ASSISTANT
The Mobile Assistant feature will
activate Apple’s Siri® Eyes Free mode
via the steering wheel switches. To
operate the Mobile Assistant, a
compatible cellular phone must be
registered and connected to this
system via Bluetooth®. (→P.43)
1
The Mobile Assistant can be used only
when the following screen is displayed.
INFORMATION
● The available features and functions
may vary based on the iOS version
installed on the connected device.
● Some Siri features are limited in Eyes
Free mode. If you attempt to use an
unavailable function, Siri will inform you
that the function is not available.
● If Siri is not enabled on the cellular
phone connected via Bluetooth®, an
error message will be displayed on the
screen.
● While a phone call is active, the Mobile
Assistant cannot be used.
● If using the navigation feature of the cellular phone, ensure the active audio
source is Bluetooth® audio or iPod in
order to hear turn by turn direction
prompts.
 To cancel the Mobile Assistant, select
“Cancel”, or press and hold the
on
the steering wheel.
 To restart the Mobile Assistant for additional commands, press the
on the
steering wheel.
• Mobile Assistant can only be restarted
after the system responds to a voice
command.
• After some phone and music commands, the Mobile Assistant feature will
automatically end to complete the
requested action.
149
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
4
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
2
Press and hold this switch until you
hear the beeps.
 The volume of the Mobile Assistant can
be adjusted using the “PWR VOL”
knob or steering wheel volume control
switches. The Mobile Assistant and
phone call volumes are synchronized.
2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION
MICROPHONE
It is not necessary to speak directly into
the microphone when using the Mobile
Assistant.
(Microphone
location:
→P.138)
INFORMATION
● Wait for the listening beeps before using
the Mobile Assistant.
● The Mobile Assistant may not recognize
commands in the following situations:
• Spoken too quickly.
• Spoken at a low or high volume.
• The roof or windows are open.
• Passengers are talking while the
Mobile Assistant is being used.
• The air conditioning speed is set high.
• The air conditioning vents are turned
toward the microphone.
150
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
5
1
INFORMATION
2
1
USEFUL INFORMATION
3
1. RECEIVING WEATHER
INFORMATION ......................... 152
4
DISPLAYING WEATHER
INFORMATION ................................. 152
5
2. RECEIVING TRAFFIC MAP
INFORMATION ......................... 154
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC MAP
INFORMATION ................................. 154
3. DATA SERVICES SETTINGS..... 155
6
7
SETTING DOWNLOAD METHODS .... 155
8
9
151
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. USEFUL INFORMATION
1. RECEIVING WEATHER INFORMATION
Entune Audio Plus
Entune Premium Audio
Weather information can be received
via the HD Radio.
Entune Premium Audio
Weather information can be received
via the HD Radio or by the Entune App
Suite application on a Bluetooth®
phone. For details about the Entune
App Suite application: →P.339
DISPLAYING WEATHER
INFORMATION
1
2
Select “Weather”.
3
Check that the “Weather” screen is displayed.
Press the “APPS” button.
Entune Audio Plus
No.
Function
Select to display the weather of the
current location. (→P.153)
Select to display the weather of a
desired location in the recently
checked locations list.
Select to display the weather of a
desired location in the national cities
list.
Select to display the weather of a
desired location in the other local cities list.
152
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. USEFUL INFORMATION
No.
*
DISPLAYING THE WEATHER
OF THE CURRENT LOCATION
Function
Select to display weather information over the map.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
INFORMATION
● Weather information is available in the
48 states, D.C. and Alaska of the United
States.
1
Display
the
(→P.152)
2
3
Select “Current Weather”.
“Weather”
screen.
Select the desired tab to be displayed.
INFORMATION
● If weather is set to the home screen, the
weather screen of the current location
will be displayed.
5
INFORMATION
153
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. USEFUL INFORMATION
2. RECEIVING TRAFFIC MAP INFORMATION*
Traffic map information can be received via the HD Radio.
3
Check that the “Traffic Map” screen is
displayed.
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC MAP
INFORMATION
1
Press the “APPS” button.
No.
Function
Current position of your car
2
Select “Traffic”.
Traffic information line
The line color means the following:
Red: Heavy congestion
Yellow: Moderate traffic
Green: Freely flowing traffic
INFORMATION
● Traffic map information is available in
the 48 states, D.C. and Alaska of the
United States.
*: Entune Audio Plus only
154
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. USEFUL INFORMATION
3. DATA SERVICES SETTINGS*
4
SETTING DOWNLOAD
METHODS
Data service information, which is
comprised of traffic information and
weather information, can be received
via the HD Radio and by the Entune
App Suite application on a Bluetooth®
phone. The receiving method can be
set to both or only via the HD Radio.
For details about the Entune App Suite
application: →P.339
1
Press the “APPS” button.
Select the desired item to be set.
 Select a checkbox on the right to set.
No.
Function
Select to receive data only via the
HD Radio.
INFORMATION
2
3
Select “Setup”.
● These settings are available in the 48
states, D.C. and Alaska of the United
States.
Select “HD Data”.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
155
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
5
INFORMATION
Select to receive data service information via both the HD Radio and
the Entune App Suite application on
a Bluetooth® phone. When both
methods are available, the HD Radio will be selected.
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
1
REAR VIEW MONITOR
SYSTEM
2
TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST
MONITOR
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR
SYSTEM..................................... 158
1. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST
MONITOR .................................. 168
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ....... 158
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS ................... 158
TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST
MONITOR.......................................... 168
SCREEN DESCRIPTION .................... 160
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS ................... 168
SCREEN DISPLAY .............................. 170
2. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS ......................... 162
USING THE SYSTEM .......................... 171
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN........ 162
2. ESTIMATED COURSE LINE
DISPLAY MODE ....................... 173
THE CAMERA ..................................... 163
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE
SCREEN AND THE ACTUAL
ROAD ................................................ 164
WHEN APPROACHING
THREE-DIMENSIONAL
OBJECTS.......................................... 165
3. THINGS YOU SHOULD
KNOW ........................................ 167
IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS .... 167
SCREEN DESCRIPTION..................... 173
PARKING ............................................. 174
3. PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE
DISPLAY MODE ....................... 175
SCREEN DESCRIPTION..................... 175
PARKING ............................................. 176
4. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST
MONITOR PRECAUTIONS....... 177
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN ........ 177
THE CAMERA...................................... 178
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE
SCREEN AND THE ACTUAL
ROAD ................................................ 179
WHEN APPROACHING
THREE-DIMENSIONAL
OBJECTS .......................................... 180
5. THINGS YOU SHOULD
KNOW ....................................... 182
IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS..... 182
156
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6
1
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
2
3
6. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
PRECAUTIONS......................... 205
PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
1. PANORAMIC VIEW
MONITOR .................................. 184
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS................... 184
CAMERA SWITCH .............................. 187
DISPLAY ............................................. 187
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY ...... 189
2. CHECKING AROUND THE
VEHICLE.................................... 191
SCREEN DISPLAY ............................. 191
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN........ 205
THE CAMERA ..................................... 208
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE
SCREEN AND THE ACTUAL
ROAD ................................................ 210
WHEN APPROACHING
THREE-DIMENSIONAL
OBJECTS .......................................... 212
4
5
6
7. THINGS YOU SHOULD
KNOW ....................................... 215
IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS .... 215
3. CHECKING THE FRONT AND
AROUND THE VEHICLE........... 192
3
7
PRODUCT LICENSE........................... 217
SCREEN DISPLAY ............................. 192
8
4. CHECKING THE SIDES OF
THE VEHICLE............................ 195
9
SCREEN DISPLAY ............................. 195
5. CHECKING THE REAR AND
AROUND THE VEHICLE........... 198
SCREEN DISPLAY ............................. 198
GUIDE LINES DISPLAYED ON THE
SCREEN ........................................... 200
PARKING ............................................ 203
157
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM*
REAR VIEW MONITOR
SYSTEM
The rear view monitor system assists
the driver by displaying an image of the
view behind the vehicle with fixed
guide lines on the screen while backing
up, for example while parking.
INFORMATION
● The screen illustrations used in this text
are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist the
driver when backing up. When backing
up, be sure to visually check all around
the vehicle both directly and using the
mirrors before proceeding. If you do
not, you may hit another vehicle, and
could possibly cause an accident.
Pay attention to the following precautions when using the rear view monitor
system.
*: If equipped
158
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
WARNING
WARNING
● Do not use the rear view monitor system
in the following cases:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in
snow
• When using tire chains or emergency
tires
• When the back door is not closed completely
• On roads that are not flat or straight,
such as curves or slopes.
● In low temperatures, the screen may
darken or the image may become faint.
The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become
unable to see the image on the screen.
Be sure to visually check all around the
vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding.
● If the tire sizes are changed, the position
of the fixed guide lines displayed on the
screen may change.
● The camera uses a special lens. The
distances between objects and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed
on the screen will differ from the actual
distances. (→P.164)
159
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
● Never depend on the rear view monitor
system entirely when backing up. The
image and the position of the guide lines
displayed on the screen may differ from
the actual state.
Use caution, just as you would when
backing up any vehicle.
● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing
the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
● The instructions given are only guidelines. When and how much to turn the
steering wheel will vary according to
traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of
this before using the rear view monitor
system.
● When parking, be sure to check that the
parking space will accommodate your
vehicle before maneuvering into it.
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
SCREEN DESCRIPTION
Vehicles without a smart key system
The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to the
“R” position while the engine switch is in “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to the
“R” position while the engine <power> switch is in IGNITION ON <ON> mode.
No.
*
Display
Function
Vehicle width guide lines
Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed
straight up.
• The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle
width.
Vehicle center guide line
These line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the
ground.
Distance guide line
Shows distance behind the vehicle.
• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from
the edge of the bumper.
Distance guide line
Shows distance behind the vehicle.
• Displays a point approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (blue) from
the edge of the bumper.
Intuitive parking assist
If an obstacle is detected while the intuitive parking assist
is on, a display is shown in the top right corner of the
screen.
*: If equipped
160
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
CANCELING REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
The rear view monitor system is canceled when the shift lever is shifted into any
position other than the “R” position.
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
161
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
2. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
AREA DISPLAYED ON
SCREEN
INFORMATION
● The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to vehicle orientation
conditions.
● Objects which are close to either corner
of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be displayed.
● The camera uses a special lens. The
distance of the image that appears on
the screen differs from the actual distance.
● Items which are located higher than the
camera may not be displayed on the
monitor.
The rear view monitor system displays
an image of the view from the bumper
of the rear area of the vehicle.
Displayed area
Screen
Corners of bumper
 The image adjustment procedure for the
rear view monitor system screen is the
same as the procedure for adjusting the
navigation screen. (→P.40)
162
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
THE CAMERA
NOTICE
The camera for the rear view monitor
system is located as shown in the illustration.
If dirt or foreign matter (such as water
droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering
to the camera, it cannot transmit a
clear image. In this case, flush it with a
large quantity of water and wipe the
camera lens clean with a soft and wet
cloth.
163
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
USING THE CAMERA
● The rear view monitor system may not
operate properly in the following cases.
• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the
position and mounting angle of the
camera may change.
• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble
or modify it. This may cause incorrect
operation.
• When cleaning the camera lens, flush
the camera with a large quantity of
water and wipe it with a soft and wet
cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens
may cause the camera lens to be
scratched and unable to transmit a
clear image.
• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax,
window cleaner or glass coat to adhere
to the camera. If this happens, wipe it
off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly,
such as when hot water is poured on
the vehicle in cold weather, the system
may not operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do not
apply intensive bursts of water to the
camera or camera area. Doing so may
result in the camera malfunctioning.
● Do not expose the camera to strong
impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND
THE VEHICLE SLOPES UP
SHARPLY
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN
THE SCREEN AND THE
ACTUAL ROAD
 The distance guide lines and the vehicle
width guide lines may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking
space, even when they appear to be so.
Be sure to check visually.
 The distances between the vehicle width
guide lines and the left and right dividing
lines of the parking space may not be
equal, even when they appear to be so.
Be sure to check visually.
 The distance guide lines give a distance
guide for flat road surfaces. In any of the
following situations, there is a margin of
error between the fixed guide lines on the
screen and the actual distance/course on
the road.
The distance guide lines will appear to
be closer to the vehicle than the actual
distance. Because of this, objects will
appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will
be a margin of error between the
guidelines and the actual distance/
course on the road.
164
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND
THE VEHICLE SLOPES DOWN
SHARPLY
WHEN ANY PART OF THE
VEHICLE SAGS
The distance guide lines will appear to
be further from the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects
will appear to be closer than they actually are. In the same way, there will be
a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual distance/course on
the road.
When any part of the vehicle sags due
to the number of passengers or the distribution of the load, there is a margin
of error between the fixed guide lines
on the screen and the actual distance/
course on the road.
6
WHEN APPROACHING
THREE-DIMENSIONAL
OBJECTS
The distance guide lines are displayed
according to flat surfaced objects
(such as the road). It is not possible to
determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using
the vehicle width guide lines and distance guide lines. When approaching a
three-dimensional object that extends
outward (such as the flatbed of a
truck), be careful of the following.
165
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
A margin of error
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
VEHICLE WIDTH GUIDE LINES
Visually check the surroundings and
the area behind the vehicle. In the case
shown below, the truck appears to be
outside of the vehicle width guide lines
and the vehicle does not look as if it
hits the truck. However, the rear body
of the truck may actually cross over the
vehicle width guide lines. In reality if
you back up as guided by the vehicle
width guide lines, the vehicle may hit
the truck.
DISTANCE GUIDE LINES
Visually check the surroundings and
the area behind the vehicle. On the
screen, it appears that a truck is parking at point B. However, in reality if you
back up to point A, you will hit the truck.
On the screen, it appears that A is closest and C is furthest away. However, in
reality, the distance to A and C is the
same, and B is farther than A and C.
Positions of A, B and C
C
AB
C
B
A

Vehicle width guide lines
166
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
3. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW
IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the
solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
Symptom
Solution
• The vehicle is in a dark
area
• The temperature around
the lens is either high or low
• The outside temperature is
low
• There are water droplets on
the camera
• It is raining or humid
• Foreign matter (mud etc.) is
adhering to the camera
• Sunlight or headlights are
shining directly into the
camera
• The vehicle is under fluorescent
lights,
sodium
lights, mercury lights etc.
Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the monitor again
once conditions have been
improved.)
The procedure for adjusting
the picture quality of the rear
view monitor system is the
same as the procedure for
adjusting
the
navigation
screen. (→P.40)
The image is blurry
Dirt or foreign matter (such as
water droplets, snow, mud
etc.) is adhering to the camera.
Flush the camera with a large
quantity of water and wipe the
camera lens clean with a soft
and wet cloth.
The image is out of alignment
The camera or surrounding
area has received a strong
impact.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
The camera position is out of
alignment.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
• The vehicle is tilted (there is
a heavy load on the vehicle,
tire pressure is low due to a
tire puncture, etc.)
• The vehicle is used on an
incline.
If this happens due to these
causes, it does not indicate a
malfunction.
Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings.
The image is difficult to see
The fixed guide lines are very
far out of alignment
167
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Likely cause
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
1. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR*
TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST
MONITOR
The parking assist monitor assists the
driver by displaying an image of the
view behind the vehicle while backing
up, for example while parking.
INFORMATION
● The screen illustrations used in this text
are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
The parking assist monitor is a supplemental device intended to assist the
driver when backing up. When backing
up, be sure to visually check all around
the vehicle both directly and using the
mirrors before proceeding. If you do
not, you may hit another vehicle, and
could possibly cause an accident.
WARNING
● Never depend on the parking assist
monitor entirely when backing up. The
image and the position of the guide lines
displayed on the screen may differ from
the actual state.
Use caution, just as you would when
backing up any vehicle.
● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing
the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
● If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles,
obstacles, people or mount the shoulder,
depress the brake pedal to stop the
vehicle.
● The instructions given are only guidelines. When and how much to turn the
steering wheel will vary according to
traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of
this before using the parking assist system.
● When parking, be sure to check that the
parking space will accommodate your
vehicle before maneuvering into it.
Pay attention to the following precautions when using the parking assist
monitor.
*: If equipped
168
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
WARNING
● Do not use the parking assist monitor
system in the following cases:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in
snow
• When using tire chains or emergency
tires
• When the back door is not closed completely
• On roads that are not flat or straight,
such as curves or slopes.
● In low temperatures, the screen may
darken or the image may become faint.
The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become
unable to see the image on the screen.
Be sure to visually check all around the
vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding.
● If the tire sizes are changed, the position
of the guide lines displayed on the
screen may change.
● The camera uses a special lens. The
distances between objects and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed
on the screen will differ from the actual
distances. (→P.179)
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
169
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
SCREEN DISPLAY
Vehicles without a smart key system
The parking assist monitor screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to the
“R” position while the engine switch is in “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The parking assist monitor screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to the
“R” position while the engine <power> switch is in IGNITION ON <ON> mode.

Intuitive parking assist*
If an obstacle is detected while the intuitive parking assist is on, a display is shown
in the top right corner of the screen.
CANCELING TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
The parking assist monitor is canceled when the shift lever is shifted into any position other than the “R” position.
*: If equipped
170
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
Parking assist guide line display mode
(→P.175)
USING THE SYSTEM
The steering wheel return points (parking assist guide lines) are displayed.
Use any of the following modes.
Distance guide line display mode
Estimated course line display mode
(→P.173)
Distance guide lines only are displayed.
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Estimated course lines are displayed
which move in accordance with the operation of the steering wheel.
6
171
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
SWITCHING THE DISPLAY
MODE
1
2
3
4
Press the “APPS” button.
5
Select the display mode.
Select “Setup”.
Select “Vehicle”.
Select “Back Camera Guide Line
Setting”.
No.
Name
Detail
Estimated course
line display mode
173
Parking assist
guide line display
mode
175
Distance guide
line display mode
Distance guide
lines only are
displayed.
172
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
2. ESTIMATED COURSE LINE DISPLAY MODE
SCREEN DESCRIPTION
No.
Display
Function
Estimated course lines
Show a estimated course when the steering wheel is
turned.
Distance guide lines
Show distance behind the vehicle when the steering
wheel is turned.
• The guide lines move in conjunction with the estimated
course lines.
• The guide lines display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5
m) (red) and approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from the
center of the edge of the bumper.
Distance guide line
Shows distance behind the vehicle.
• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (blue)
from the edge of the bumper.
Vehicle center guide line
This line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the
ground.
WARNING
● If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle width guide lines and the estimated
course lines are not in alignment, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
173
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Vehicle width guide line
Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed
straight up.
• The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle
width.
• These guide lines align with the estimated course lines
when the vehicle is going straight ahead.
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
3
PARKING
When parking in a space which is in
the reverse direction to the space described in the procedure below, the
steering directions will be reversed.
1
2
Shift the shift lever to the “R” position.
Turn the steering wheel so that the estimated course lines are within the
parking space, and back up slowly.


When the rear position of the vehicle
has entered the parking space, turn the
steering wheel so that the vehicle width
guide lines are within the left and right
dividing lines of the parking space.
Parking space
Estimated course lines
Vehicle width guide line
4
Once the vehicle width guide lines and
the parking space lines are parallel,
straighten the steering wheel and back
up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space.
5
Stop the vehicle in an appropriate
place, and finish parking.
174
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
3. PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE DISPLAY MODE
SCREEN DESCRIPTION
No.
Display
Function
Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed
straight up.
• The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle
width.
Parking assist guide lines
Show the path of the smallest turn possible behind the vehicle.
• Show the approximate position of the steering wheel
when parking.
Distance guide lines
Show distance behind the vehicle.
• Display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from
the edge of the bumper.
Vehicle center guide line
This line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the
ground.
175
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Vehicle width guide line
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
PARKING
When parking in a space which is in
the reverse direction to the space described in the procedure below, the
steering directions will be reversed.
1
2

Shift the shift lever to the “R” position.
Back up until the parking assist guide
line meets the edge of the left-hand dividing line of the parking space.
3
Turn the steering wheel all the way to
the right, and back up slowly.
4
Once the vehicle is parallel with the
parking space, straighten the steering
wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space.
5
Stop the vehicle in an appropriate
place, and finish parking.
Parking assist guide line
Parking space dividing line
176
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
4. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR PRECAUTIONS
AREA DISPLAYED ON
SCREEN
INFORMATION
The parking assist monitor displays an
image of the view from the bumper of
the rear area of the vehicle.
Displayed area
● The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to vehicle orientation
conditions.
● Objects which are close to either corner
of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be displayed.
● The camera uses a special lens. The
distance of the image that appears on
the screen differs from the actual distance.
● Items which are located higher than the
camera may not be displayed on the
monitor.
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Screen
Corners of bumper
 The image adjustment procedure for the
parking assist monitor screen is the same
as the procedure for adjusting the navigation screen. (→P.40)
177
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
THE CAMERA
The camera for the parking assist monitor is located as shown in the illustration.
USING THE CAMERA
If dirt or foreign matter (such as water
droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering
to the camera, it cannot transmit a
clear image. In this case, flush it with a
large quantity of water and wipe the
camera lens clean with a soft and wet
cloth.
NOTICE
● The parking assist monitor may not
operate properly in the following cases.
• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the
position and mounting angle of the
camera may change.
• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble
or modify it. This may cause incorrect
operation.
• When cleaning the camera lens, flush
the camera with a large quantity of
water and wipe it with a soft and wet
cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens
may cause the camera lens to be
scratched and unable to transmit a
clear image.
• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax,
window cleaner or glass coat to adhere
to the camera. If this happens, wipe it
off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly,
such as when hot water is poured on
the vehicle in cold weather, the system
may not operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do not
apply intensive bursts of water to the
camera or camera area. Doing so may
result in the camera malfunctioning.
● Do not expose the camera to strong
impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
178
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND
THE VEHICLE SLOPES UP
SHARPLY
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN
THE SCREEN AND THE
ACTUAL ROAD
The distance guide lines will appear to
be closer to the vehicle than the actual
distance. Because of this, objects will
appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will
be a margin of error between the
guidelines and the actual distance/
course on the road.
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
 The distance guide lines and the vehicle
width guide lines may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking
space, even when they appear to be so.
Be sure to check visually.
 The distances between the vehicle width
guide lines and the left and right dividing
lines of the parking space may not be
equal, even when they appear to be so.
Be sure to check visually.
 The distance guide lines give a distance
guide for flat road surfaces. In any of the
following situations, there is a margin of
error between the guide lines on the
screen and the actual distance/course on
the road.
179
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND
THE VEHICLE SLOPES DOWN
SHARPLY
The distance guide lines will appear to
be further from the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects
will appear to be closer than they actually are. In the same way, there will be
a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual distance/course on
the road.
WHEN ANY PART OF THE
VEHICLE SAGS
When any part of the vehicle sags due
to the number of passengers or the distribution of the load, there is a margin
of error between the guide lines on the
screen and the actual distance/course
on the road.
A margin of error
WHEN APPROACHING
THREE-DIMENSIONAL
OBJECTS
The estimated course lines target a flat
surfaced objects (such as the road). It
is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such
as vehicles) using the estimated
course lines and distance guide lines.
When approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as
the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the
following.
180
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
ESTIMATED COURSE LINES
DISTANCE GUIDE LINES
Visually check the surroundings and
the area behind the vehicle. In the case
shown below, the truck appears to be
outside of the estimated course lines
and the vehicle does not look as if it
hits the truck. However, the rear body
of the truck may actually cross over the
estimated course lines. In reality if you
back up as guided by the estimated
course lines, the vehicle may hit the
truck.
Visually check the surroundings and
the area behind the vehicle. On the
screen, it appears that a truck is parking at point B. However, in reality if you
back up to point A, you will hit the truck.
On the screen, it appears that A is closest and C is furthest away. However, in
reality, the distance to A and C is the
same, and B is farther than A and C.
Positions of A, B and C
6
C
C
B
A

Estimated course lines
181
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
AB
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
5. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW
IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the
solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
Symptom
Likely cause
Solution
The image is difficult to see
• The vehicle is in a dark
area
• The temperature around
the lens is either high or low
• The outside temperature is
low
• There are water droplets on
the camera
• It is raining or humid
• Foreign matter (mud etc.) is
adhering to the camera
• Sunlight or headlights are
shining directly into the
camera
• The vehicle is under fluorescent
lights,
sodium
lights, mercury lights etc.
Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the monitor again
once conditions have been
improved.)
The procedure for adjusting
the picture quality of the parking assist monitor is the same
as the procedure for adjusting
the
navigation
screen.
(→P.40)
The image is blurry
Dirt or foreign matter (such as
water droplets, snow, mud
etc.) is adhering to the camera.
Flush the camera with a large
quantity of water and wipe the
camera lens clean with a soft
and wet cloth.
The image is out of alignment
The camera or surrounding
area has received a strong
impact.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
182
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
Symptom
Likely cause
Solution
The guide lines are very far
out of alignment
The camera position is out of
alignment.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
• The vehicle is tilted (there is
a heavy load on the vehicle,
tire pressure is low due to a
tire puncture, etc.)
• The vehicle is used on an
incline.
If this happens due to these
causes, it does not indicate a
malfunction.
Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings.
The estimated course lines
move even though the steering wheel is straight
There is a malfunction in the
signals being output by the
steering sensor.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
Guide lines are not displayed
The back door is open.
Close the back door.
If this does not resolve the
symptom, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
• The steering wheel has
been moved while the 12volt battery was being reinstalled.
• 12-volt battery power is low.
• The steering sensor has
been reinstalled.
• There is a malfunction in
the signals being output by
the steering sensor.
Stop the vehicle, and turn the
steering wheel as far as it will
go to the left and right.
If this does not resolve the
symptom, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
183
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
The estimated course lines
are not displayed
6
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
1. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR*
Panoramic view monitor assists the
driver in viewing the surroundings,
when operating at low speeds, by combining the front, side and rear cameras
and displaying a complete vehicle
overhead image on the screen.
Vehicles without a smart key system
When you press the camera switch or
shift the shift lever to the “R” position
while the engine switch is in “ON” position, the panoramic view monitor
operates.
Vehicles with a smart key system
When you press the camera switch or
shift the shift lever to the “R” position
while the engine <power> switch is in
IGNITION ON <ON> mode, the panoramic view monitor operates.
The monitor displays various views of
the position and surroundings of the
vehicle.
INFORMATION
● The screen illustrations used in this text
are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
The panoramic view monitor is a supplemental device intended to assist the
driver when checking around the vehicle. When using, be sure to visually
check all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding. If you do not, you may hit
another vehicle or possibly cause an
accident.
Pay attention to the following precautions when using the panoramic view
monitor.
WARNING
● Never depend on the panoramic view
monitor entirely. The image and the
position of the guide lines displayed on
the screen may differ from the actual
state. Use caution just as you would
when driving any other vehicle.
● Always make sure to check all around
the vehicle with your own eyes when
driving.
● Never drive while looking only at the
screen as the image on the screen is different from actual conditions. If you are
driving while looking only at the screen,
you may hit a person or an object,
resulting in an accident. When driving,
be sure to check the vehicle’s surroundings with your own eyes and the vehicle’s mirrors.
*: If equipped
184
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
WARNING
NOTICE
● In panoramic view/moving view/seethrough view, the system combines
images taken from the front, back, left
and right side cameras into a single
image. There are limits to the range and
content that can be displayed. Familiarize yourself with the characteristics of
the panoramic view monitor system
before using it.
● Image clarity may decline at the four corners of the panoramic view/moving view/
see-through view. However, this is not a
malfunction, as these are the regions
along the border of each camera image
where the images are combined.
● Depending on lighting conditions near
each of the cameras, bright and dark
patches may appear on the panoramic
view/moving view/see-through view.
● The panoramic view/moving view/seethrough view display does not extend
higher than the installation position and
image capture range of each camera.
185
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
● Depending on the circumstances of the
vehicle (number of passengers, amount
of luggage, etc.), the position of the
guide lines displayed on the screen may
change. Be sure to check visually
around the vehicle before proceeding.
● Do not use the panoramic view monitor
system in the following cases:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in
snow
• When using tire chains or emergency
tires
• When the back door is not closed completely
• On roads that are not flat or straight,
such as curves or slopes
● In low temperatures, the screen may
darken or the image may become faint.
The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become
unable to see the image on the screen.
Be sure to visually check all around the
vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding.
● If the tire sizes are changed, the position
of the guide lines displayed on the
screen may change.
● The camera uses a special lens. The
distances between objects and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed
on the screen will differ from the actual
distances. (→P.210)
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
NOTICE
● There are blind spots around the vehicle. Accordingly, there are regions not
displayed in panoramic view/moving
view/see-through view.
● Three-dimensional objects displayed in
wide front view or rear view may not be
displayed in panoramic view/moving
view/see-through view.
● People and other three-dimensional
obstacles may appear differently when
displayed on the panoramic view monitor. (These differences include, among
others, cases in which displayed objects
appear to have fallen over, disappear
near image processing areas, appear
from image processing areas, or when
the actual distance to an object differs
from the displayed position.)
NOTICE
● When the back door, which is equipped
with the back camera, or front doors,
which are equipped with door mirrors
that have built-in side cameras, are
open, images will not be displayed properly on the panoramic view monitor.
● The vehicle icon displayed in panoramic
view/moving view/see-through view is a
computer generated image. Accordingly,
properties such as the color, shape and
size will differ from the actual vehicle.
For this reason, nearby three-dimensional objects may appear to be touching the vehicle, and actual distances to
three-dimensional objects may differ
from those displayed.
186
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
CAMERA SWITCH
DISPLAY
The camera switch is located as shown
in the illustration.
CHECKING AROUND THE
VEHICLE
Moving view
See-through view
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
187
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
CHECKING THE FRONT AND
AROUND THE VEHICLE
Wide front view & panoramic view
CHECKING THE SIDES OF THE
VEHICLE
CHECKING THE REAR AND
AROUND THE VEHICLE
Rear view & panoramic view
Wide rear view
Side views
Rear view
188
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY
Vehicles without a smart key system
When you press the camera switch or shift the shift lever to the “R” position while
the engine switch is in “ON” position, the panoramic view monitor operates.
Vehicles with a smart key system
When you press the camera switch or shift the shift lever to the “R” position while
the engine <power> switch is in IGNITION ON <ON> mode, the panoramic view
monitor operates.
The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle. (The following is
an example)
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
189
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
Map screen,
audio screen, etc.
Moving view
See-through view
Map screen,
audio screen, etc.
Rear view &
panoramic view
Side views
Wide front view &
panoramic view
Rear view
Wide rear view
Pressing the camera switch
Shifting the shift lever
Selecting the display mode switching button
190
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
2. CHECKING AROUND THE VEHICLE
The moving view screen and the see-through view screen provide support when
checking the areas of around the vehicle while parking. Displays an image of the
vicinity of the vehicle combined from the 4 cameras. The screen will display a 360°
view around the vehicle from either inside the vehicle or from a birds-eye view at
an angle.
To display the screen, press the camera switch when the shift lever is in the “P”
position.
SCREEN DISPLAY
Moving view
See-through view
6
Display
Function
See-through view switch
Select to change to the see-through view screen.
Moving view switch
Select to change to the moving view screen.
Rotation pause switch
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
No.
Select to pause the rotation of the screen.
To resume rotation, select
.
INFORMATION
● Pressing the camera switch again changes the screen back to the previously displayed
screen, such as the navigation screen.
191
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
3. CHECKING THE FRONT AND AROUND THE VEHICLE
The wide front view & panoramic view screen provides support when checking the
areas in front of the vehicle and around the vehicle when taking-off at T-intersections or other intersections during poor visibility.
To display the screen, press the camera switch when the shift lever is in the “N” or
“D” position with the vehicle moving approximately 7 mph (12 km/h) or less.
SCREEN DISPLAY
Wide front view & panoramic view
No.
Display
Function
Distance guide lines
Shows distance in front of the vehicle.
• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge
of the bumper.
Estimated course lines
Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel is
turned.
• This line will be displayed when the steering wheel is
turned more than 90° from the center.
Automatic display button
Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. The indicator on the button illuminates during automatic display
mode. (→P.194)
Guide line switching button
Select to change the guide line mode between the distance guide line mode and the estimated course line
mode. (→P.194)
Intuitive parking assist
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and
the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed
and the buzzer sounds.
192
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
INFORMATION
● Pressing the camera switch changes the screen to the side views screen or previously
displayed screen, such as the navigation screen.
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
193
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
SWITCHING THE GUIDE LINE
MODE
AUTOMATIC DISPLAY MODE
In addition to screen switching by operating the camera switch, automatic display mode is available. In this mode,
the screen is switched automatically in
response to vehicle speed.
Each time the guide line switching button is selected, the mode will change
as follows:
Distance guide line
In automatic mode, the monitor will automatically display images in the following
situations:
 When the shift lever is shifted to “N” or “D”
position.
 When vehicle speed is reduced to approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
 Only the distance guide lines are displayed.
Estimated course line
 Estimated course lines will be added to
the distance guide lines.
194
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
4. CHECKING THE SIDES OF THE VEHICLE
The side views screen provides support when checking the areas on both sides of
the vehicle, for example when taking off and stopping, when turning, etc.
To display the screen, press the camera switch when the shift lever is in the “N” or
“D” position with the vehicle moving approximately 7 mph (12 km/h) or less.
SCREEN DISPLAY
Side views
6
Display
Function
Distance guide lines
Show distance in front of the vehicle.
• Display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) from the
edge of the bumper.
Vehicle width guide lines
Shows guide lines of the vehicle’s width including the outside rear view mirrors.
Front tire guide lines
Shows guide lines of where the front tire touches the
ground.
Automatic display button
Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. The indicator on the button illuminates during automatic display
mode. (→P.196)
Intuitive parking assist
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and
the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed
and the buzzer sounds.
INFORMATION
● Pressing the camera switch changes the screen to the wide front view & panoramic view
screen or previously displayed screen, such as the navigation screen.
195
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
No.
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
AUTOMATIC DISPLAY MODE
USING THE VEHICLE WIDTH
GUIDE LINE
In addition to screen switching by operating the camera switch, automatic display mode is available. In this mode,
the screen is switched automatically in
response to vehicle speed.
In automatic mode, the monitor will automatically display images in the following
situations:
• When the shift lever is shifted to “N” or
“D” position.
• When vehicle speed is reduced to
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
 Check the positions and distance between
the vehicle width guide line and a target
object such as the obstacle or curb of the
road.
196
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
 Pull over to the curb as shown in the illustration above, taking care not to let the
vehicle width guide line overlap the target
object.
 Ensure that the vehicle width line is parallel to the target object enables parking
alongside the target object.
197
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
5. CHECKING THE REAR AND AROUND THE VEHICLE
The rear view & panoramic view screen, the wide rear view screen and the rear
view screen provide support when checking the areas of behind the vehicle and
around the vehicle while backing up, for example while parking.
The screens will be displayed when the shift lever is in the “R” position.
SCREEN DISPLAY
Each time the display mode switching button is selected, the mode will change as
follows:
 Rear view & panoramic view
Displays the rear view and overhead view of the vehicle at same time.
 Wide rear view
Displays a near 180° image from the rear view camera.
198
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
 Rear view
Displays the rear view of the vehicle.
No.
Function
Display mode switching
button
Each time the display mode switching button is selected,
the mode will change as follows:
• From the rear view & panoramic view mode to the wide
rear view mode
• From the wide rear view mode to the rear view mode
• From the rear view mode to the rear view & panoramic
view mode
Guide line switching button
Select to switch the guide line mode. (→P.200)
Intuitive parking assist
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and
the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed
and the buzzer sounds.
INFORMATION
● The monitor is cancelled when the shift lever is shifted into any position other than the “R”
position.
199
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Display
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
GUIDE LINES DISPLAYED ON THE SCREEN
Each time the guide line switching button is selected, the mode will change as follows:
 Estimated course line
Estimated course lines are displayed which move in accordance with the operation
of the steering wheel.
 Parking assist guide line
The steering wheel return points (parking assist guide lines) are displayed.
200
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
 Distance guide line
Only distance guide line is displayed.
No.
Display
Function
Shows distance in front of the vehicle.
• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge
of the bumper.
Vehicle width guide lines
Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed
straight up.
• The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle
width.
• These guide lines align with the estimated course lines
when the vehicle is going straight ahead.
Estimated course lines
Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel is
turned.
Distance guide lines
Shows the distance behind the vehicle when the steering
wheel is turned.
• The guide lines move in conjunction with the estimated
course lines.
• The guide lines display points approximately 1.5 ft.
(0.5 m) (red) and approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from
the center of the edge of the bumper.
Distance guide line
Shows the distance behind the vehicle.
• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red*)
from the edge of the bumper.
*: In estimated course line mode, the line will turn blue.
Parking assist guide lines
Shows the path of the smallest turn possible behind the
vehicle.
• Shows the approximate position of the steering wheel
when parking.
Vehicle center guide line
This line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the
ground.
201
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Distance guide lines
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
WARNING
● Depending on the circumstances of the vehicle (number of passengers, amount of luggage, etc.), the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may change. Be sure
to check visually around the vehicle before proceeding.
● If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle width guide lines and the estimated
course lines are not in alignment, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
● Do not use the system if the display is incorrect due to an uneven (hilly) road or a nonstraight (curvy) road.
202
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
3
PARKING
USING THE ESTIMATED
COURSE LINE
When the rear position of the vehicle
has entered the parking space, turn the
steering wheel so that the vehicle width
guide lines are within the left and right
dividing lines of the parking space.
When parking in a space which is in
the reverse direction to the space described in the procedure below, the
steering directions will be reversed.
1
2
Shift the shift lever to the “R” position.
Turn the steering wheel so that the estimated course lines are within the
parking space, and back up slowly.
6
4
Once the vehicle width guide lines and
the parking space lines are parallel,
straighten the steering wheel and back
up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space.
5
Stop the vehicle in an appropriate
place, and finish parking.
Parking space
Estimated course lines
203
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Vehicle width guide line
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
USING PARKING ASSIST
GUIDE LINE
When parking in a space which is in
the reverse direction to the space described in the procedure below, the
steering directions will be reversed.
1
2
Shift the shift lever to the “R” position.
Back up until the parking assist guide
line meets the edge of the left-hand dividing line of the parking space.
3
Turn the steering wheel all the way to
the right, and back up slowly.
4
Once the vehicle is parallel with the
parking space, straighten the steering
wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space.
5
Stop the vehicle in an appropriate
place, and finish parking.
Parking assist guide line
Parking space dividing line
204
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
6. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR PRECAUTIONS
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN
AREA OF IMAGE OF PANORAMIC VIEW
The panoramic view monitor displays an image of the surrounding view of the vehicle.
Since the panoramic view processes and displays images based on flat road surfaces, it cannot depict the position of three-dimension objects (such as vehicle
bumpers, etc.) that are in positions higher than the surface of the road. Even if there
is room between the bumpers of the vehicles and it seems not likely to collide in the
image, in reality, the both vehicles are on a collision course.
Check the safety of the surroundings directly.
*1
Capture range
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Blind spot
*2
Capture range
*1:Objects located in the shaded areas will not be displayed on the screen.
*2: Parts of objects which extend above a certain height cannot be displayed on the screen.
205
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
INFORMATION
● As the images obtained from four cameras are processed and displayed on
the standard of a flat road surface; the
panoramic
view/moving
view/seethrough view may be displayed as follows.
• Objects may look collapsed; thinner or
bigger than usual.
• An object with a higher position than
the road surface may look farther away
than it actually is or may not appear at
all.
• Tall objects may appear protruding
from the non-displayed areas of the
image.
● Variations in the brightness of the image
may appear for every camera.
● The displayed image may be shifted by
inclination of the vehicle body, change in
vehicle height, etc., depending on the
number of passengers, amount of luggage, fuel quantity, etc.
● If the front doors or back door are not
completely closed; neither the image nor
the guide lines are displayed.
● The position relations of the vehicle icon
and the road surface or obstacle may
differ from the actual positions.
● The black areas of the vicinity of the
vehicle icon are areas that are not captured by the camera.
● Images like the following are combined,
thus some areas may be difficult to view.
WARNING
● When the Intuitive parking assist display
is red, be sure to check directly and do
not proceed any further. An unexpected
accident may occur, such as a vehicle
collision.
AREA OF THE IMAGE
CAPTURED BY THE CAMERA
Wide front view
206
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
Side views
Rear view
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
207
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
Wide rear view
THE CAMERA
The cameras for the panoramic view
monitor are located as shown in the illustration.
Front camera
Side cameras
INFORMATION
● Black masking is done for distance
detection differences to the front of the
vehicle.
● The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects which are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper cannot be seen on the screen.
● The area displayed on the screen may
vary depending on vehicle orientation or
road conditions.
● The camera uses a special lens. The
distance in the image displayed on the
screen will differ from the actual distance.
Rear camera
208
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
USING THE CAMERA
NOTICE
If dirt or foreign matter (such as water
droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering
to the camera, it cannot transmit a
clear image. In this case, flush it with a
large quantity of water and wipe the
camera lens clean with a soft and wet
cloth.
209
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
● The panoramic view monitor may not
operate properly in the following cases.
• If the camera is hit, the position and
mounting angle of the camera may
change.
• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble
or modify it. This may cause incorrect
operation.
• When cleaning the camera lens, flush
the camera with a large quantity of
water and wipe it with a soft and wet
cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens
may cause the camera lens to be
scratched and unable to transmit a
clear image.
• Do not allow an organic solvent, car
wax, window cleaner or a glass coating
to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly,
such as when hot water is poured on
the vehicle in cold weather, the system
may not operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do not
apply intensive bursts of water to the
camera or camera area. Doing so may
result in the camera malfunctioning.
● Do not expose the camera to strong
impacts as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND
THE VEHICLE SLOPES UP
SHARPLY
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN
THE SCREEN AND THE
ACTUAL ROAD
 The distance guide lines and the vehicle
width guide lines may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking
space, even when they appear to be so.
Be sure to check visually.
 The distances between the vehicle width
guide lines and the left and right dividing
lines of the parking space may not be
equal, even when they appear to be so.
Be sure to check visually.
 The distance guide lines give a distance
guide for flat road surfaces. In any of the
following situations, there is a margin of
error between the guide lines on the
screen and the actual distance/course on
the road.
The distance guide lines will appear to
be closer to the vehicle than the actual
distance. Because of this, objects will
appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will
be a margin of error between the
guidelines and the actual distance/
course on the road.
210
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND
THE VEHICLE SLOPES DOWN
SHARPLY
WHEN ANY PART OF THE
VEHICLE SAGS
The distance guide lines will appear to
be farther from the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects
will appear to be closer than they actually are. In the same way, there will be
a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual distance/course on
the road.
When any part of the vehicle sags due
to the number of passengers or the distribution of the load, there is a margin
of error between the guide lines on the
screen and the actual distance/course
on the road.
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
A margin of error
211
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
WHEN APPROACHING
THREE-DIMENSIONAL
OBJECTS
The estimated course lines target flat
surfaced objects (such as the road). It
is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such
as vehicles) using the estimated
course lines and distance guide lines.
When approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as
the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the
following.
ESTIMATED COURSE LINES
Since the estimated course line is displayed for a flat road surface, it can not
depict the position of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicle bumpers,
etc.) that are in positions higher than
the surface of the road. Even if the
bumpers of the vehicle is on the outside of the estimated course line in the
image, in reality, the vehicles are on a
collision course.
WARNING
● When the intuitive parking assist display
is red, be sure to check directly and do
not proceed any further. An unexpected
accident may occur, such as a vehicle
collision.
Estimated course line
212
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
Three-dimensional objects (such as
the overhang of a wall or loading platform of a truck) in high positions may
not be projected on the screen. Check
the safety of the surroundings directly.
Visually check the surroundings and
the area behind the vehicle. In the case
shown below, the truck appears to be
outside of the estimated course lines
and the vehicle does not look as if it
hits the truck. However, the rear body
of the truck may actually cross over the
estimated course lines. In reality if you
back up as guided by the estimated
course lines, the vehicle may hit the
truck.
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
RV215Ia
Estimated course lines
213
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
DISTANCE GUIDE LINES
Visually check the surroundings and
the area behind the vehicle. On the
screen, it appears that a truck is parking at point B. However, in reality if you
back up to point A, you will hit the truck.
On the screen, it appears that A is closest and C is farthest away. However, in
reality, the distance to A and C is the
same, and B is farther than A and C.
Positions of A, B and C
C
AB
C
B
A
214
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
7. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW
IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the
solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
Symptom
Solution
• The vehicle is in a dark
area
• The temperature around
the lens is either high or low
• The outside temperature is
low
• There are water droplets on
the camera
• It is raining or humid
• Foreign matter (mud etc.) is
adhering to the camera
• Sunlight or headlights are
shining directly into the
camera
• The vehicle is under fluorescent
lights,
sodium
lights, mercury lights etc.
Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the monitor again
once conditions have been
improved.)
The procedure for adjusting
the picture quality of the panoramic view monitor system
is the same as the procedure
for adjusting the navigation
screen. (→P.40)
The image is blurry
Dirt or foreign matter (such as
water droplets, snow, mud
etc.) is adhering to the camera.
Flush the camera with a large
quantity of water and wipe the
camera lens clean with a soft
and wet cloth.
The image is out of alignment
The camera or surrounding
area has received a strong
impact.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
The image is difficult to see
215
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Likely cause
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
Symptom
Likely cause
Solution
The guide lines are very far
out of alignment
The camera position is out of
alignment.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
• The vehicle is tilted. (There
is a heavy load on the vehicle, tire pressure is low due
to a tire puncture, etc.)
• The vehicle is used on an
incline.
If this happens due to these
causes, it does not indicate a
malfunction.
Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings.
The estimated course lines
move even though the steering wheel is straight
There is a malfunction in the
signals being output by the
steering sensor.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
Guide lines are not displayed
The back door is open.
Close the back door.
If this does not resolve the
symptom, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
The estimated course lines
are not displayed
• The steering wheel has been
moved while the 12-volt
battery was being reinstalled.
• 12-volt battery power is low.
• The steering sensor has
been reinstalled.
• There is a malfunction in
the signals being output by
the steering sensor.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
The See-through view/Moving view cannot be displayed
The Intuitive parking assist
may be malfunctioning or
dirty.
Follow the correction procedures for malfunctions of the
Intuitive parking assist. (Refer
to “Owner’s Manual”)
216
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
PRODUCT LICENSE
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
217
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
218
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
7
1
PHONE
2
1
4. RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE ...................................... 231 3
PHONE OPERATION
(HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
INCOMING CALLS .............................. 231
1. QUICK REFERENCE................... 220
4
5. TALKING ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE ...................................... 232
2. SOME BASICS ............................ 221
INCOMING CALL WAITING ................ 234
REGISTERING/CONNECTING A
Bluetooth® PHONE ........................... 221
6. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE
FUNCTION ................................ 235
USING THE PHONE SWITCH/
MICROPHONE ................................. 222
RECEIVING A MESSAGE ................... 236
REPLYING TO A MESSAGE
(QUICK REPLY) ................................ 238
ABOUT THE CONTACTS IN THE
CONTACT LIST ................................ 224
7
CALLING THE MESSAGE SENDER... 239
WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING OF
THE VEHICLE................................... 224
BY FAVORITES LIST .......................... 226
6
CHECKING MESSAGES..................... 237
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM.............. 223
3. CALLING ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE....................................... 225
5
8
2
SETUP
1. PHONE/MESSAGE
SETTINGS................................. 240
BY CALL HISTORY ............................. 227
BY CONTACTS LIST .......................... 228
PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS
SCREEN ........................................... 240
BY DIAL PAD ...................................... 229
“Sound Settings” SCREEN .................. 241
BY OFF HOOK SWITCH ..................... 230
“Contact/Call History Settings”
SCREEN ........................................... 242
BY “Home” SCREEN ........................... 230
“Messaging Settings” SCREEN ........... 250
“Phone Display Settings” SCREEN ..... 252
3
WHAT TO DO IF...
1. TROUBLESHOOTING ................ 253
219
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
9
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
1. QUICK REFERENCE
The phone top screen can be used to make a phone call. To display the hands-free
operation screen, press the “APPS” button and select “Phone”, the
switch
on the steering wheel or
switch on the instrument panel.
Several functions are available to operate on each screen that is displayed by selecting the 4 tabs.
Function
Page
Registering/connecting Bluetooth® phone
Calling on the
Bluetooth®
Phone operation
Receiving on the
Message function
Setting up a phone
43
phone
Bluetooth®
225
phone
231
Talking on the Bluetooth® phone
232
Using the Bluetooth® phone message function
235
Phone settings
240
®
Bluetooth settings
48
220
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
2. SOME BASICS
The hands-free system enables calls
to be made and received without having to take your hands off the steering
wheel.
This system supports Bluetooth®.
Bluetooth® is a wireless data system
that enables cellular phones to be used
without being connected by a cable or
placed in a cradle.
The operating procedure of the phone
is explained here.
WARNING
● While driving, do not use a cellular
phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone.
● Before using Bluetooth® devices, users
of any electrical medical device other
than implantable cardiac pacemakers,
cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter
defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information
about its operation under the influence
of radio waves. Radio waves could have
unexpected effects on the operation of
such medical devices.
● Do not leave your cellular phone in the
vehicle. The temperature inside may rise
to a level that could damage the phone.
INFORMATION
● If your cellular phone does not support
Bluetooth®, this system cannot function.
● In the following conditions, the system
may not function:
• The cellular phone is turned off.
• The current position is outside the
communication area.
• The cellular phone is not connected.
• The cellular phone has a low battery.
● When using Bluetooth® audio and
hands-free at the same time, the following problems may occur:
• The Bluetooth® connection may be
cut.
• Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth®
audio playback.
REGISTERING/CONNECTING
A Bluetooth® PHONE
To use the hands-free system for cellular phones, it is necessary to register a
cellular phone with the system.
(→P.43)
Bluetooth® PHONE CONDITION
DISPLAY
The condition of the Bluetooth® phone
appears on the upper right side of the
screen. (→P.18)
221
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
7
PHONE
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth®
antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers
or
implantable cardioverter defibrillators
should maintain a reasonable distance
between themselves and the Bluetooth®
antennas. The radio waves may affect
the operation of such devices.
NOTICE
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
MICROPHONE
USING THE PHONE SWITCH/
MICROPHONE
The microphone is used when talking
on the phone.
STEERING SWITCH
By pressing the phone switch, a call
can be received or ended without taking your hands off the steering wheel.
Volume control switches
 Press the “+” side to increase the volume.
 Press the “-” side to decrease the volume.
Off hook switch
On hook switch
222
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
INFORMATION
Press this switch to operate the voice
command system.
 The voice command system and its list
of commands can be operated.
(→P.138)
223
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
7
PHONE
● The other party’s voice will be heard
from the front speakers. The audio system will be muted during phone calls or
when hands-free voice commands are
used.
● Talk alternately with the other party on
the phone. If both parties speak at the
same time, the other party may not hear
what has been said. (This is not a malfunction.)
● Keep call volume down. Otherwise, the
other party’s voice may be audible outside the vehicle and voice echo may
increase. When talking on the phone,
speak clearly towards the microphone.
● The other party may not hear you clearly
when:
• Driving on an unpaved road. (Making
excessive traffic noise.)
• Driving at high speeds.
• The roof or windows are open.
• The air conditioning vents are pointed
towards the microphone.
• The sound of the air conditioning fan is
loud.
• There is a negative effect on sound
quality due to the phone and/or network being used.
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
ABOUT THE CONTACTS IN
THE CONTACT LIST
 The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another phone is
connected, the following registered data
cannot be read:
• Contact data
• Call history data
• Favorites data
• Image data
• All phone settings
• Message settings
INFORMATION
● When a phone’s registration is deleted,
the above-mentioned data is also
deleted.
WHEN SELLING OR
DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE
A lot of personal data is registered
when the hands-free system is used.
When selling or disposing of the vehicle, initialize the data. (→P.62)
 The following data in the system can be
initialized:
• Contact data
• Call history data
• Favorites data
• Image data
• All phone settings
• Message settings
INFORMATION
● Once initialized, the data and settings
will be erased. Pay much attention when
initializing the data.
224
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
3. CALLING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
After a Bluetooth® phone has been
registered, a call can be made using
the hands-free system. There are several methods by which a call can be
made, as described below.
1
3
Select the desired tab to call from.
Press the “APPS” button.
Entune Audio Plus
 The phone top screen can be displayed by
pressing the
wheel or
panel.
switch on the steering
switch on the instrument
Entune Premium Audio
7
PHONE
2
Select “Phone”.
225
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
How to make a call list
Page
By favorites list
226
By call history
227
By contacts list*1
228
By dial pad*1
229
By e-mail/SMS/MMS
239
By POI call*
2
275
By off hook switch
230
By Entune App Suite*1, 2
346
By voice command system
143
By “Home” screen
230
*1: The operation cannot be performed while
driving.
*2: Entune Premium Audio only
BY FAVORITES LIST
Calls can be made using registered
contacts which can be selected from a
contact list. (→P.248)
1
Display the
(→P.225)
2
Select the “Favorites” tab and select
the desired contact.
3
4
Select the desired number.
phone
top
screen.
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
226
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
BY CALL HISTORY
INFORMATION
Up to 30 of the latest call history items
(missed, incoming and outgoing) can
be selected from the “Call History” tab.
1
Display the
(→P.225)
2
Select the “Call History” tab and select
phone
top
screen.
or the desired contact.
● When making a call to the same number
continuously, only the most recent call is
listed in call history.
● When a phone number registered in the
contact list is received, the name is displayed.
● Number-withheld calls are also memorized in the system.
● International phone calls may not be
made depending on the type of cellular
phone you have.
● The list should group together consecutive entries with the same phone number
and same call type. For example, two
calls from Kay Rowles’s mobile would
be displayed as follows: Kay Rowles (2)
● By pressing the
switch on the
steering wheel, a call to the latest history
item can be made.
 The icons of call type are displayed.
PHONE
: Missed call
: Incoming call
: Outgoing call
When
3
is selected
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
When the desired contact is selected
3
4
7
Select the desired number.
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
227
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
WHEN THE CONTACT IS
EMPTY
BY CONTACTS LIST
Calls can be made by using contact
data which is transferred from a registered cellular phone. (→P.228)
■FOR
Up to 2500 contacts (maximum of 4
phone numbers and e-mail addresses
per contact) can be registered in the
contact list.
When “Automatic Transfer” is set to on
(→P.242)
1
2
Display the
(→P.225)
phone
top
COMPATIBLE
Bluetooth PHONES
 Contacts are transferred automatically.
screen.
When “Automatic Transfer” is set to off
(→P.242)
1
Select the desired item.
Select the “Contacts” tab and select
the desired contact.
No.
3
4
PBAP
®
Select the desired number.
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
Function
Select to transfer new contacts from
a cellular phone, select “Always”
and then enable “Automatic Transfer”.
Select to transfer all the contacts
from a connected cellular phone
only once.
Select to cancel transferring.
228
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
■FOR PBAP INCOMPATIBLE BUT
OPP COMPATIBLE
PHONES
1
Bluetooth®
Select the desired item.
No.
INFORMATION
● Manual transfer operation cannot be
performed while driving.
● If your cellular phone is neither PBAP
nor OPP compatible, the contacts cannot be transferred.
● Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone:
• It may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone when transferring contact data.
• The registered image in the contact list
may not transfer depending on the
type of Bluetooth® phone connected.
Function
BY DIAL PAD
Select to transfer the contacts from
the connected cellular phone.
Select to add a new contact manually.
Select to cancel transferring.
1
Display the
(→P.225)
2
Select the “Dial Pad” tab and enter the
phone number.
3
Select
or press the
on the steering wheel.
4
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
phone
top
screen.
2
Follow the steps in “FOR PBAP INCOMPATIBLE BUT OPP COMPATIBLE Bluetooth® PHONES” from
“STEP 2”. (→P.244)
When “Add” is selected
2
Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A
NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACT
LIST” from “STEP 2”. (→P.245)
switch
INFORMATION
● Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on
the phone.
229
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
PHONE
When “Transfer” is selected
7
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
BY OFF HOOK SWITCH
BY “Home” SCREEN
Calls can be made using the latest call
history item.
1
Press the
switch on the steering
wheel to display the phone top screen.
2
Press the
switch on the steering
wheel to display the “Call History”
screen.
3
Press the
switch on the steering
wheel to call the latest history item.
4
1
2
Display the home screen. (→P.36)
3
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
Select the desired contact.
INFORMATION
● If “No phone connected.” is displayed on
the screen, a registered phone is not
connected to the system. To connect a
registered phone, select the “Select
Phone”.
REGISTERING A NEW
CONTACT
1
Select and hold the screen button to
add a contact.
2
3
Select the desired contact.
Select the desired number.
INFORMATION
● If there is no contact in the contacts list,
the contacts cannot be registered at the
home screen.
● The contact cannot be registered at the
home screen while driving.
230
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
4. RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
INCOMING CALLS
When a call is received, this screen is
displayed with a sound.
1
Select
or press the
switch
on the steering wheel to talk on the
phone.
To refuse to receive the call: Select
or press the
switch on the
steering wheel.
To adjust the volume of a received call:
Turn the “PWR VOL” knob, or use the volume control switch on the steering wheel.
7
PHONE
INFORMATION
● During international phone calls, the
other party’s name or number may not
be displayed correctly depending on the
type of cellular phone you have.
● The incoming call display mode can be
set. (→P.252)
● The ringtone that has been set in the
“Sound Settings” screen sounds when
there is an incoming call. Depending on
the type of Bluetooth® phone, both the
system and Bluetooth® phone may
sound simultaneously when there is an
incoming call. (→P.241)
231
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
5. TALKING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
While talking on the phone, this screen
is displayed. The operations outlined
below can be performed on this
screen.
No.
Function
Page
Select to display the dial
pad to send tones.
232
Select to mute your voice
to the other party.
⎯
Select to change handset
modes between handsfree and cellular phone.
⎯
Select to adjust your voice
volume that the other party
hears from their speaker.
233
Select to send tones. This
button only appears when
a number that contains a
(w) is dialed in hands-free
mode.
233
Select to hang up the
phone.
⎯
Select “+” or “-” to adjust
the volume of the other party’s voice.
⎯
Select to start talking with
the other party.
234
INFORMATION
● Changing from hands-free call to cellular
phone call is not possible while driving.
● When cellular phone call is changed to
hands-free call, the hands-free screen
will be displayed and its functions can be
operated on the screen.
● Changing between cellular phone call
and hands-free call can be performed by
operating the cellular phone directly.
● Transferring methods and operations
will be different depending on the type of
cellular phone you have.
● For the operation of the cellular phone,
see the manual that comes with it.
SENDING TONES
■BY DIAL PAD
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.
1
Select “0-9”.
2
Enter the desired number.
232
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
■BY SELECTING “Release Tones”
TRANSMIT VOLUME SETTING
“Release Tones” appear when a continuous tone signal(s) containing a (w)
is registered in the contact list.
1
2
Select “Transmit Volume”.
3
Select “OK”.
This operation can be performed while
driving.
1
Select the desired level for the transmit
volume.
Select “Release Tones”.
INFORMATION
INFORMATION
● The sound quality of the voice heard
from the other party’s speaker may be
negatively impacted.
● To reset the transmit volume, select
“Default”.
● “Transmit Volume” is dimmed when
mute is on.
233
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
7
PHONE
● A continuous tone signal is a character
string that consists of numbers and the
characters
p
or
w.
(e.g.
056133w0123p#1)
● When the “p” pause tone is used, the
tone data up until the next pause tone
will be automatically sent after 2 seconds have elapsed. When the “w” pause
tone is used, the tone data up until the
next pause tone will be automatically
sent after a user operation is performed.
● Release tones can be used when automated operation of a phone based service such as an answering machine or
bank phone service is desired. A phone
number with continuous tone signals
can be registered in the contact list.
● Tone data after a “w” pause tone can be
operated on voice command during a
call.
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
INCOMING CALL WAITING
When a call is interrupted by a third
party while talking, this screen is displayed.
1
Select
or press the
switch
on the steering wheel to start talking
with the other party.
To refuse to receive the call: Select
or press the
steering wheel.
switch on the
 Each time
is selected or the
switch on the steering wheel is pressed
during an interrupted call, the party who is
on hold will be switched.
INFORMATION
● This function may not be available
depending on the type of cellular phone.
234
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
6. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION
Received messages can be forwarded
from the connected Bluetooth® phone,
enabling checking and replying using
the system.
2
Select “Phone”.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone connected, received messages
may not be transferred to the message
inbox.
If the phone does not support the message function, this function cannot be
used.
1
Press the “APPS” button.
Entune Audio Plus
 You can also display the message inbox
screen to select “Messages”. (→STEP4)
3
Select
.
 The phone top screen can be displayed by
pressing the
wheel or
panel.
4
switch on the steering
switch on the instrument
Check that the message inbox screen
is displayed.
7
PHONE
Entune Premium Audio
: Select to change to phone mode.
Function
Page
Receiving a message
236
Checking messages
237
Replying to a message (quick reply)
238
Calling the message sender
239
Message settings
250
235
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
RECEIVING A MESSAGE
When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is received, the incoming message screen
pops up with sound and is ready to be
operated on the screen.
No.
Function
Select to check the message.
INFORMATION
● Depending on the cellular phone used
for receiving messages, or its registration status with the system, some information may not be displayed.
● The pop up screen is separately available for incoming e-mail and SMS/MMS
messages under the following conditions:
E-mail:
• “Incoming E-mail Display” is set to “Full
Screen”. (→P.250)
• “E-mail Notification Popup” is set to on.
(→P.250)
SMS/MMS:
• “Incoming SMS/MMS Display” is set to
“Full Screen”. (→P.250)
• “SMS/MMS Notification Popup” is set
to on. (→P.250)
Select to not open the message.
Select to call the message sender.
236
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
CHECKING MESSAGES
1
No.
Function
Select to make a call to the sender.
Display the message inbox screen.
(→P.235)
*: E-mail only
2
Select the desired message from the
list.
INFORMATION
3
Check that the message is displayed.
No.
Select “Mark Unread” or “Mark
Read” to mark mail unread or read
on the message inbox screen.
This function is available when “Update Read Status on Phone” is set to
on. (→P.250)
Select to
(→P.238)
reply
the
message.
● Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be
necessary to perform additional steps on
the phone.
● Messages are displayed in the
appropriate
connected
Bluetooth®
phone’s registered mail address folder.
Select the tab of the desired folder to be
displayed.
● Only received messages on the
connected Bluetooth® phone can be
displayed.
● The text of the message is not displayed
while driving.
● Turn the “PWR VOL” knob, or use the
volume control switch on the steering
wheel to adjust the message read out
volume.
Select to display the previous or
next message.
Select to have messages read out.
To cancel this function, select
“Stop”.
When “Automatic Message Readout” is set to on, messages will be
automatically read out. (→P.250)
237
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
7
PHONE
*
Function
● Reading a text message is not available
while driving.
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
■EDITING QUICK REPLY MESSAG-
REPLYING TO A MESSAGE
(QUICK REPLY)
ES
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.
15 messages have already been
stored.
1
Display the message inbox screen.
(→P.235)
2
Select the desired message from the
list.
3
Select “Quick Message”.
4
5
Select the desired message.
1
Select “Quick Message”.
2
Select
corresponding to the desired message to edit.
3
Select “OK” when editing is completed.
INFORMATION
Select “Send”.
 While the message is being sent, a sending message screen is displayed.
 To cancel sending the message, select
“Cancel”.
● To reset the editquick reply messages,
select “Default”.
● “Quick Message 1” (“I am driving and
will arrive in approximately [ETA]
minutes.”)*:
This message cannot be edited and will
automatically fill in [ETA] with the
navigation calculated estimated time of
arrival on the confirm message screen.
If there are waypoints set, [ETA] to the
next waypoint will be shown.
If there is no route currently set in the
navigation system, “Quick Message 1”
cannot be selected.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
238
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
■CALLING FROM A NUMBER WITH-
CALLING THE MESSAGE
SENDER
IN A MESSAGE
Calls can be made to an e-mail/SMS/
MMS message sender’s phone number.
This operation can be performed while
driving.
■CALLING FROM E-MAIL/SMS/MMS
MESSAGE DISPLAY
1
Display the message inbox screen.
(→P.235)
2
Select the desired message.
3
Select
Calls can be made to a number identified in a message’s text area.
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.
1
Display the message inbox screen.
(→P.235)
2
3
Select the desired message.
Select the text area.
.
7
Select the desired number.
 Identified phone numbers contained in the
message are displayed.
5
 If there are 2 or more phone numbers,
select the desired number.
4
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
INFORMATION
● A series of numbers may be recognized
as a phone number. Additionally, some
phone numbers may not be recognized,
such as those for other countries.
■CALLING FROM THE INCOMING
MESSAGE SCREEN
→P.236
239
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
PHONE
4
2. SETUP
1. PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS
1
Press the “APPS” button.
Entune Audio Plus
PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS
SCREEN
No.
Entune Premium Audio
Information
Page
Registering/connecting
phone
a
Sound settings
Contact/call
tings
2
3
4
48
241
history
set-
242
Messaging settings
250
Phone display settings
252
Select “Setup”.
DISPLAYING THE PHONE/
MESSAGE SETTINGS SCREEN
IN A DIFFERENT WAY
Select “Phone”.
Select the item to be set.
1
Display the
(→P.225)
2
Select “Settings”.
phone
top
screen.
240
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. SETUP
“Sound Settings” SCREEN
No.
The call and ringtone volume can be
adjusted. A ringtone can be selected.
1
Display the “Phone/Message Settings”
screen. (→P.240)
2
3
Select “Sound Settings”.
Select the desired item to be set.
Function
Select to set the desired ringtone.
Select “-” or “+” to adjust the ringtone volume.
Select “-” or “+” to adjust the message readout volume.
Select to set the desired incoming
SMS/MMS tone.
Select “-” or “+” to adjust the incoming SMS/MMS tone volume.
Select to set the desired incoming email tone.
Select “-” or “+” to adjust the incoming e-mail tone volume.
Select “-” or “+” to adjust the default volume of the other party’s
voice.
PHONE
Select to reset all setup items.
INFORMATION
● Depending on the type of phone, certain
functions may not be available.
241
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
7
20:05
2. SETUP
“Contact/Call History
Settings” SCREEN
No.
Function
Page
For PBAP compatible
Bluetooth® phones, select
to set automatic contact/
history transfer on/off.
When set to on, the
phone’s contact data and
history are automatically
transferred.
⎯
Select to update contacts
from the connected phone.
243
Select to sort contacts by
the first name or last name
field.
⎯
Select to add contacts to
the favorites list.
248
Select to delete contacts
from the favorites list.
249
Select to set the transferred contact image display on/off.
⎯
*
Select to clear contacts
from the call history.
⎯
*
Select to add new contacts
to the contact list.
245
*
Select to edit contacts in
the contact list.
246
The contact can be transferred from a
Bluetooth® phone to the system. The
contact also can be added, edited and
deleted.
The call history can be deleted and
contact and favorites can be changed.
1
Display the “Phone/Message Settings”
screen. (→P.240)
2
Select “Contact/Call History Settings”.
3
Select the desired item to be set.
242
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. SETUP
No.
*
Function
Page
Select to delete contacts
from the contact list.
247
Select to reset all setup
items.
⎯
UPDATE CONTACTS FROM
PHONE
*: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®
phones, this function is available when
“Automatic Transfer” is set to off.
(→P.242)
Operation methods differ between
PBAP compatible and PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth®
phones.
If your cellular phone is neither PBAP
nor OPP compatible, the contacts cannot be transferred.
■FOR
INFORMATION
● Depending on the type of phone, certain
functions may not be available.
● Contact data is managed independently
for every registered phone. When one
phone is connected, another phone’s
registered data cannot be read.
PBAP
®
COMPATIBLE
Bluetooth PHONES
1
Select “Update
Phone”.
Contacts
from
 Contacts are transferred automatically.
2
 This operation may be unnecessary
depending on the type of cellular phone.
 Depending on the type of cellular phone,
OBEX authentication may be required
when transferring contact data. Enter
“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.
 If another Bluetooth® device is connected
when transferring contact data, depending
on the phone, the connected Bluetooth®
device may need to be disconnected.
 Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the
phone.
243
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
7
PHONE
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
2. SETUP
■FOR PBAP INCOMPATIBLE BUT
■UPDATING THE CONTACTS IN A
®
DIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE “Call
History” SCREEN)
OPP COMPATIBLE
PHONES
Bluetooth
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.
1
Select “Update
Phone”.
2
Transfer the contact data to the system
Contacts
from
using a Bluetooth® phone.
 This operation may be unnecessary
depending on the type of cellular phone.
 Depending on the type of cellular phone,
OBEX authentication may be required
when transferring contact data. Enter
“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.
 To cancel this function, select “Cancel”.
3
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
For only OPP compatible Bluetooth®
phones, this function is available when
“Automatic Transfer” is set to off.
(→P.242)
1
Display the
(→P.225)
2
Select the “Call History” tab and select a contact not yet registered in the
contact list.
3
4
5
Select “Update Contact”.
phone
top
screen.
Select the desired contact.
Select a phone type for the phone
number.
244
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. SETUP
■REGISTERING A NEW CONTACT IN
REGISTERING A NEW
CONTACT TO THE CONTACT
LIST
A DIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE
“Call History” SCREEN)
New contact data can be registered.
Up to 4 numbers per person can be
registered. For PBAP compatible
Bluetooth® phones, this function is
available when “Automatic Transfer” is
set to off. (→P.242)
1
2
3
Select “New Contact”.
4
Select the phone type for the phone
number.
5
To add another number to this contact,
select “Yes”.
Enter the name and select “OK”.
For only OPP compatible Bluetooth®
phones, this function is available when
“Automatic Transfer” is set to off.
(→P.242)
1
Display the
(→P.225)
2
Select the “Call History” tab and select a contact not yet registered in the
contact list.
phone
top
screen.
Enter the phone number and select
“OK”.
7
PHONE
245
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. SETUP
3
4
■EDITING THE CONTACT IN A DIF-
Select “Add to Contacts”.
FERENT WAY (FROM THE “Contact
Details” SCREEN)
Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A
NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACT
LIST” from “STEP 2”. (→P.245)
1
Display the
(→P.225)
EDITING THE CONTACT DATA
2
Select the “Contacts”, “Call History”
tab or the “Favorites” tab and select
the desired contact.
3
Select “Edit Contact”.
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®
phones, this function is available when
“Automatic Transfer” is set to off.
(→P.242)
1
2
Select “Edit Contacts”.
3
Select
corresponding to the desired name or number.
phone
top
screen.
Select the desired contact.
“E-mail Addresses”: Select to display all
registered e-mail addresses for the contact.
4
Follow the steps in “EDITING THE
CONTACT DATA” from “STEP 4”.
(→P.246)
For editing the name
4
Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A
NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACT
LIST” from “STEP 2”. (→P.245)
For editing the number
4
Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A
NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACT
LIST” from “STEP 3”. (→P.245)
246
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. SETUP
■DELETING THE CONTACT IN A DIF-
DELETING THE CONTACT
DATA
FERENT WAY (FROM THE “Contact
Details” SCREEN)
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®
phones, this function is available when
“Automatic Transfer” is set to off.
(→P.242)
1
2
Select “Delete Contacts”.
3
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
Select the desired contact and select
“Delete”.
1
Display the
(→P.225)
2
Select the “Contacts”, “Call History”
tab or the “Favorites” tab and select
the desired contact.
3
4
Select “Delete Contact”.
phone
top
screen.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
INFORMATION
INFORMATION
● Multiple data can be selected and
deleted at the same time.
● When a Bluetooth® phone is deleted,
the contact data will be deleted at the
same time.
7
PHONE
247
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. SETUP
When 15 contacts have already been
registered to the favorites list
FAVORITES LIST SETTING
Up to 15 contacts (maximum of 4 numbers per contact) can be registered in
the favorites list.
1
When 15 contacts have already been
registered to the favorites list, a registered contact needs to be replaced.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears to replace a contact.
2
Select the contact to be replaced.
3
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
■REGISTERING THE CONTACTS IN
THE FAVORITES LIST
1
2
Select “Add Favorite”.
Select the desired contact to add to the
favorites list.
 Dimmed contacts are already stored as a
favorite.
3
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
248
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. SETUP
Registering contacts in the favorites list
in a different way (from the “Contacts”
screen)
1
2
3
Display the
(→P.225)
phone
top
screen.
■DELETING THE CONTACTS IN THE
FAVORITES LIST
1
2
Select “Remove Favorite”.
3
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
4
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
Select the “Contacts” tab.
Select the desired contacts and select
“Remove”.
Select  at the beginning of the desired contact list name to be registered
in the favorites list.
Registering contacts in the favorites list
in a different way (from the “Contact Details” screen)
1
Display the
(→P.225)
2
Select the “Contacts” tab or the “Call
History” tab and select the desired
contact.
3
4
Select “Add Favorite”.
phone
top
7
PHONE
 When selected,  is changed to , and
the contact is registered in the favorites
list.
screen.
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
249
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. SETUP
Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a
different way (from the “Contacts”
screen)
1
Display the
(→P.225)
2
3
Select the “Contacts” tab.
phone
top
screen.
Select  at the beginning of the contact list name to be deleted from the favorites list.
 When selected,  is changed to
the data is deleted from the list.
“Messaging Settings”
SCREEN
1
Display the “Phone/Message Settings”
screen. (→P.240)
2
3
Select “Messaging Settings”.
Select the desired item to be set.
, and
Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a
different way (from the “Contact Details”
screen)
1
Display the
(→P.225)
phone
top
screen.
No.
Function
2
Select the “Contacts”, “Call History”
tab or the “Favorites” tab and select
the desired contact to delete.
3
4
Select “Remove Favorite”.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
Select to set the SMS/MMS notification popup on/off.
5
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
Select to set the e-mail notification
popup on/off.
Select to set automatic message
transfer on/off.
Select to set automatic message
readout on/off.
250
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. SETUP
No.
DISPLAYING THE “Messaging
Settings” SCREEN IN A
DIFFERENT WAY
Function
Select to set adding the vehicle signature to outgoing messages on/off.
Select to set updating message read
status on phone on/off.
Select to change the incoming SMS/
MMS display.
“Full Screen”: When an SMS/MMS
message is received, the incoming
SMS/MMS display screen is displayed and can be operated on the
screen.
“Drop-down”: When an SMS/MMS
message is received, a message is
displayed on the upper side of the
screen.
1
Display the
(→P.225)
2
3
Select
phone
top
screen.
.
Select “Settings”.
Select to change the incoming e-mail
display.
“Full Screen”: When an e-mail is received, the incoming e-mail display
screen is the displayed and can be
operated on the screen.
“Drop-down”: When an e-mail is received, a message is displayed on the
upper side of the screen.
7
PHONE
Select to set display of messaging account names on the inbox tab on/off.
When set to on, messaging account
names used on the cellular phone will
be displayed.
Select to reset all setup items.
INFORMATION
● Depending on the phone, these functions may not be available.
251
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. SETUP
“Phone Display Settings”
SCREEN
1
Display the “Phone/Message Settings”
screen. (→P.240)
2
3
Select “Phone Display Settings”.
Select the desired item to be set.
No.
Function
Select to change the incoming call
display.
“Full Screen”: When a call is received, the hands-free screen is displayed and can be operated on the
screen.
“Drop-down”: A message is displayed on the upper side of the
screen.
Select to set display of the contact/
history transfer completion message
on/off.
Select to reset all setup items.
INFORMATION
● Depending on the phone, these functions may not be available.
252
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. WHAT TO DO IF...
1. TROUBLESHOOTING
If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth® device, first check
the table below.
When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth® device
Page
Symptom
Likely cause
Solution
The connected device may not be a
compatible
The hands-free sys-
Bluetooth® cellular
phone.
tem or Bluetooth® device does not work.
This
system
∗
⎯
∗
46
Use a cellular phone
with Bluetooth® version 2.0 or higher (recommended: Ver. 3.0
+EDR or higher).
7
PHONE
The Bluetooth® version of the connected cellular phone
may be older than
the specified version.
For a list of specific
devices
which
operation has been
confirmed
on
this
system, check with
your Toyota dealer or
the following website:
http://www.toyota.com/
entune/
Cellular
phone
253
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. WHAT TO DO IF...
When registering/connecting a cellular phone
Page
Symptom
A cellular phone cannot be registered.
Likely cause
Solution
An incorrect passcode was entered
on
the
cellular
phone.
Cellular
phone
This
system
Enter the correct passcode on the cellular
phone.
∗
⎯
The registration operation has not been
completed on the
cellular phone side.
Complete the registration operation on the
cellular phone (approve registration on
the phone).
∗
⎯
Old registration information remains
on either this system or the cellular
phone.
Delete the existing registration
information
from both this system
and the cellular phone,
then register the cellular phone you wish to
connect to this system.
∗
50
254
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. WHAT TO DO IF...
Page
Symptom
Likely cause
Solution
Another Bluetooth®
device is already
connected.
Bluetooth® function
is not enabled on
the cellular phone.
Cellular
phone
This
system
Manually connect the
cellular phone you wish
to use to this system.
⎯
51
Enable the Bluetooth®
function on the cellular
phone.
∗
⎯
⎯
55
Set
automatic
Bluetooth® connection
on this system to on
when the engine <power> switch is in following.
A Bluetooth® connection cannot be made.
Automatic
®
Bluetooth connection on this system
is set to off.
Vehicles without a
smart key system
7
PHONE
The engine switch is
turned to the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
Vehicles with a
smart key system
The engine <power>
switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON> mode.
255
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. WHAT TO DO IF...
Page
Symptom
“Unable
to
Please check
phone.”
dial.
your
Likely cause
Solution
Bluetooth® function
is not enabled on
the cellular phone.
Old registration information remains
on either this system or the cellular
phone.
Cellular
phone
This
system
Enable the Bluetooth®
function on the cellular
phone.
∗
⎯
Delete the existing registration
information
from both this system
and the cellular phone,
then register the cellular phone you wish to
connect to this system.
∗
50
When making/receiving a call
Page
Symptom
A call cannot
made/received.
be
Likely cause
Solution
Your vehicle is in a
“No Service” area.
Move to where “No
Service” no longer appears on the display.
Cellular
phone
This
system
⎯
⎯
256
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. WHAT TO DO IF...
When using the phonebook
Page
Symptom
Phonebook data cannot be transferred
manually/automatically.
Solution
Cellular
phone
This
system
The profile version
of the connected
cellular phone may
not be compatible
with
transferring
phonebook data.
For a list of specific
devices
which
operation has been
confirmed
on
this
system, check with
your Toyota dealer or
the following website:
http://www.toyota.com/
entune/
∗
⎯
Automatic contact
transfer function on
this system is set to
off.
Set automatic contact
transfer function on this
system to on.
⎯
242
Passcode has not
been entered on the
cellular phone.
Enter the passcode on
the cellular phone if requested (default passcode: 1234).
∗
⎯
Transfer operation
on
the
cellular
phone has not completed.
Complete transfer operation on the cellular
phone (approve transfer operation on the
phone).
∗
⎯
Automatic contact
transfer function on
this system is set to
on.
Set automatic contact
transfer function on this
system to off.
⎯
242
7
PHONE
Phonebook data cannot be edited.
Likely cause
257
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. WHAT TO DO IF...
When using the Bluetooth® message function
Page
Symptom
Messages cannot be
viewed.
New message notifications are not displayed.
Likely cause
Solution
Message transfer is
not enabled on the
cellular phone.
Cellular
phone
This
system
Enable message transfer on the cellular
phone (approve message transfer on the
phone).
∗
⎯
Automatic transfer
function on this system is set to off.
Set automatic transfer
function on this system
to on.
⎯
250
Notification of SMS/
MMS/E-mail reception on this system
is set to off.
Set notification of SMS/
MMS/E-mail reception
on this system to on.
∗
250
Automatic message
transfer function is
not enabled on the
cellular phone.
Enable
automatic
transfer function on the
cellular phone.
∗
⎯
258
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. WHAT TO DO IF...
In other situations
Page
Symptom
Likely cause
Solution
Connection confirmation display on
this system is set to
on.
To turn off the display,
set connection confirmation display on this
system to off.
Cellular
phone
This
system
⎯
54
The Bluetooth® connection status is displayed at the top of
the screen each time
the engine <power>
switch is in following.
Vehicles without
a smart key system
The engine switch is
turned to the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
Vehicles with a
smart key system
7
PHONE
The engine <power>
switch is turned to
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON>
mode.
259
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. WHAT TO DO IF...
Page
Symptom
Even though all conceivable
measures
have been taken, the
symptom status does
not change.
Likely cause
Solution
The cellular phone
is not close enough
to this system.
Cellular
phone
This
system
Bring
the
cellular
phone closer to this
system.
⎯
⎯
Turn the cellular phone
off, remove and reinstall the battery pack,
and then restart the
cellular phone.
∗
⎯
∗
⎯
Stop
the
cellular
phone’s security software and close all applications.
∗
⎯
Before using an application installed on the
cellular phone, carefully check its source and
how its operation might
affect this system.
∗
⎯
Enable
The cellular phone
is the most likely
cause of the symptom.
the
cellular
phone’s
Bluetooth®
connection.
∗: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cellular phone.
260
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. WHAT TO DO IF...
7
PHONE
261
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM *
1
2
BASIC OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE ................... 264
MAP SCREEN ..................................... 264
DESTINATION SEARCH
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
SCREEN .................................... 281
NAVIGATION OPTIONS SCREEN...... 266
2. SEARCH OPERATION................ 283
2. MAP SCREEN OPERATION ....... 267
SELECTING SEARCH AREA .............. 284
CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY ......... 267
SETTING HOME AS DESTINATION ... 284
MAP SCALE ........................................ 268
SETTING PRESET DESTINATIONS
AS DESTINATION............................. 284
ORIENTATION OF THE MAP ............. 268
SWITCHING THE MAP MODE............ 269
SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION ........ 271
ADJUSTING LOCATION IN SMALL
INCREMENTS................................... 272
3. MAP SCREEN INFORMATION ... 273
SEARCHING BY ADDRESS................ 285
SEARCHING BY POINT OF
INTEREST ......................................... 286
SEARCHING FROM PREVIOUS
DESTINATIONS ................................ 289
SEARCHING BY ADDRESS BOOK .... 289
DISPLAYING MAP INFORMATION .... 273
SEARCHING BY EMERGENCY .......... 290
DISPLAYING INFORMATION ABOUT
THE ICON WHERE THE
CURSOR IS SET .............................. 275
SEARCHING BY INTERSECTION
AND FREEWAY ................................ 290
STANDARD MAP ICONS .................... 276
SEARCHING BY COORDINATES....... 292
4. TRAFFIC INFORMATION ............ 277
3. STARTING ROUTE
GUIDANCE................................ 293
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC
INFORMATION ON THE MAP.......... 279
SEARCHING BY MAP ......................... 292
STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE.......... 293
PAUSING GUIDANCE ......................... 296
262
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
8
1
NAVIGATION SYSTEM *
2
3
5
ROUTE GUIDANCE
1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN..... 297
SCREEN FOR ROUTE GUIDANCE ... 297
3
1. DETAILED NAVIGATION
SETTINGS................................. 318 4
SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION
SETTINGS ........................................ 318
ROUTE OVERVIEW............................ 298
DURING FREEWAY DRIVING............ 299
WHEN APPROACHING
INTERSECTION ............................... 300
SETUP
2. TRAFFIC SETTINGS................... 322
TURN LIST SCREEN .......................... 301
SCREEN FOR TRAFFIC
SETTINGS ........................................ 322
TURN-BY-TURN ARROW SCREEN... 301
AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC....................... 323
2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE
PROMPTS.................................. 302
MY TRAFFIC ROUTES ....................... 324
3. EDITING ROUTE ......................... 303
ADDING DESTINATIONS ................... 304
REORDERING DESTINATIONS......... 304
DELETING DESTINATIONS ............... 304
SETTING ROUTE PREFERENCES ... 305
SELECTING ROUTE TYPE ................ 305
DETOUR SETTING ............................. 306
STARTING FROM ADJACENT
ROAD................................................ 307
4
6
7
TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION
SYSTEM
8
1. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING
SYSTEM)................................... 329
9
6
LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION
SYSTEM............................................ 329
2. MAP DATABASE VERSION
AND COVERED AREA ............. 332
MAP INFORMATION ........................... 332
ABOUT THE MAP DATA ..................... 333
MEMORY POINTS
5
1. MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS .... 308
SETTING UP HOME ........................... 309
SETTING UP PRESET
DESTINATIONS................................ 310
SETTING UP ADDRESS BOOK ......... 312
SETTING UP AREAS TO AVOID........ 315
DELETING PREVIOUS
DESTINATIONS................................ 317
*: Entune Premium Audio only
263
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
MAP SCREEN
To display this screen, press the “APPS” button, then select “Navigation” on the
“Apps” screen.
No.
Name
Function
Page
2D North-up, 2D
heading-up or 3D
heading-up symbol
Indicates whether the map orientation is set to
north-up or heading-up. The letter(s) beside this
symbol indicate the vehicle’s heading direction
(e.g. N for north). In 3D map, only a heading-up
view is available.
268
Options button
Select to display the “Navigation Options” screen.
266
“GPS” mark
(Global Positioning System)
Shows that the vehicle is receiving signals from
the GPS.
329
264
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
No.
Name
Function
Page
Traffic indicator
Shows that traffic information is received. Select
to start voice guidance for traffic information.
When traffic information is received via HD, HD
mark is displayed on the right.
277
Scale indicator
This figure indicates the map scale.
268
Zoom in/out button
Select to magnify or reduce the map scale. When
either button is selected, the map scale indicator
bar appears at the bottom of the screen.
268
• Select to display the current position address.
• Select to repeat voice guidance.
302
Select to display the “Destination” screen.
281
Speed limit icon
Indicates the speed limit on the current road. The
display of the speed limit icon can be set to on/off.
273
Route information bar
Displays the current street name, or the distance
with the estimated travel time/arrival time to the
destination. The route information bar fills from
left to right as the vehicle progresses on the
route.
297
Route information button
Select to change the display between the current
street name and the distance with the estimated
travel/arrival time.
297
Current position
button/voice
guidance button
Destination
ton
but-
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
265
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
NAVIGATION OPTIONS SCREEN
The navigation options allow you to change map configurations, display/hide POI
icons, and edit the navigation routes. To display the “Navigation Options” screen,
press the “APPS” button, select “Navigation” on the “Apps” screen, and select
“Options” on the map screen.
No.
Function
Page
Select to change the map configuration.
269
Select to change the displayed map information such as POI icons,
route trace, speed limit, etc.
273
Select to display the map version and coverage area.
332
Select to edit the set route.
303
Select to pause or resume route guidance.
296
Select to display the overview of the entire route.
298
266
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
2. MAP SCREEN OPERATION
CURRENT POSITION
DISPLAY
1
Press the “APPS” button.
2
3
Select “Navigation”.
INFORMATION
● While driving, the current position mark
is fixed on the screen and the map
moves.
● The current position is automatically set
as the vehicle receives signals from the
GPS (Global Positioning System). If the
current position is not correct, it is automatically corrected after the vehicle
receives signals from the GPS.
● After the 12-volt battery disconnection,
or on a new vehicle, the current position
may not be correct. As soon as the system receives signals from the GPS, the
correct current position is displayed.
Check that the current position map is
displayed.
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
 To correct the current position manually:→P.320
267
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
MAP SCALE
1
ORIENTATION OF THE MAP
Select
or
to change the
scale of the map screen.
The orientation of the map can be
changed between 2D north-up, 2D
heading-up and 3D heading-up by selecting the orientation symbol displayed at the top left of the screen.
1
Select
,
or
.
North-up screen
 The scale indicator bar appears at the bottom of the screen.
 Select and hold
or
to continue changing the scale of the map
screen.
 The scale of the map screen can also be
changed by selecting the scale bar
directly. This function is not available while
driving.
Heading-up screen
INFORMATION
● The map scale is displayed above the
zoom in button at the bottom left of the
screen.
268
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
3D screen
No.
: North-up symbol
Regardless of the direction of vehicle travel, north is always up.
: Heading-up symbol
The direction of vehicle travel is always up.
: 3D Heading-up symbol
The direction of vehicle travel is always up.
 The letter(s) beside this symbol indicate
the vehicle’s heading direction (e.g. N for
north).
SWITCHING THE MAP MODE
Page
Select to display the single
map screen.
270
Select to display the dual
map screen.
270
Select to display the compass mode screen.
271
Select to display the turn list
screen.
301
Select to display the freeway exit list screen.
299
Select to display the intersection guidance screen or
the guidance screen on the
freeway.
300
Select to display the turnby-turn arrow screen.
301
 Depending on the conditions, certain
screen configuration buttons cannot be
selected.
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
1
2
3
Function
Select “Options” on the map screen.
Select “Map Mode”.
Select the desired configuration button.
269
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
■MAP ONLY
Editing right map
The right side map can be edited.
1
2
Select any point on the right side map.
Select the desired item.
■DUAL MAP
No.
 The map on the left is the main map.
Function
Page
Select to change the orientation of the map.
268
Select to display POI icons.
273
Select to show traffic information.
277
Select to change the map
scale.
268
 When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.
270
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
■COMPASS
Information about the destination, current position and a compass is displayed on the screen.
SCREEN SCROLL
OPERATION
Use the scroll feature to move the desired point to the center of the screen
for looking at a point on the map that is
different from the current position.
INFORMATION
● The destination mark is displayed in the
direction of the destination. When driving, refer to the longitude and latitude
coordinates, and the compass, to make
sure that the vehicle is headed in the
direction of the destination.
● When the vehicle travels out of the coverage area, the guidance screen
changes to the whole compass mode
screen.
No.
Information/Function
Cursor mark
Distance from the current position to
the cursor mark.
Select to register as a memory point.
To change the icon, name, etc.:
→P.312
Select to return to the current position.
271
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to set as a destination.
When selecting “Go to
” on the
following map screen, the navigation
system performs a search for the
route. (→P.293)
If a destination has already been set,
“Go to ” and “Add to Route” will
be displayed.
“Go to ”: Select to delete the existing destination(s) and set a new
one.
“Add to Route”: Select to add a
destination.
1. BASIC OPERATION
 To scroll over the map screen, place the
cursor mark in the desired position and
then touch and hold the map screen. The
map will continue scrolling in that direction
until the finger is released.
ADJUSTING LOCATION IN
SMALL INCREMENTS
The cursor location can be adjusted in
small increments when “Adjust Location” is selected on the setting map
screen.
Also, when changing the location of
memory points on the editing screen
(P.314) and adjusting the current position mark manually on the “Calibration”
screen (P.320), 8 directional arrows
may appear for this purpose.
1
Select one of the 8 directional arrows
to move the cursor to the desired point
and then select “OK”.
272
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
3. MAP SCREEN INFORMATION
SELECTING THE POI ICONS
DISPLAYING MAP
INFORMATION
Information such as POI icons, route
trace, speed limit, etc. can be displayed on the map screen.
1
2
3
1
Display the “Map Information” screen.
(→P.273)
2
Select “Select POI”.
Select “Options” on the map screen.
 When the POI icons to be displayed on
the map screen have already been set,
“Change POI” is displayed.
Select “Map Information”.
3
Select the desired items to be displayed.
Select the desired POI category and
select “OK”.
No.
No.
Page
Select to display the selected POI icons.
⎯
Select to select or change
POI icons.
273
Select
trace.
275
to
display
route
Select to display speed limit
icon.
⎯
Select to display traffic information.
277
 When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.
Page
Displays up to 5 selected
POI icons on the map
screen
−
Select to cancel the selected POI icons.
−
Displays up to 6 POI icons
as favorite POI categories
319
Select to display other POI
categories if the desired
POIs cannot be found on
the screen.
274
Select to search for the
nearest POIs.
274
8
273
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Function
Information/Function
1. BASIC OPERATION
■SELECTING OTHER POI ICONS TO
■DISPLAYING THE LOCAL POI LIST
BE DISPLAYED
1
2
Select “Other POIs”.
Select the desired POI categories and
select “OK”.
“List All Categories”: Select to display all
POI categories. To add more POI categories, select “More”.
POIs that are within 20 miles (32 km) of
the current position will be listed from
among the selected categories.
1
2
Select “Find Local POI”.
Select the desired POI.
“Near...”: Select to search for POIs near
the current position or along the route.
3
Check that the selected POI is displayed on the map screen. (→P.271)
When “Near...” is selected
1
Select the desired item.
“Near Here”: Select to search for POIs
near the current position.
“Along My Route”: Select to search for
POIs along the route.
274
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
ROUTE TRACE
The traveled route can be stored and
retraced on the map screen. This feature is available when the map scale is
30 miles (50 km) or less.
1
Display the “Map Information” screen.
(→P.273)
2
Select “Route Trace”.
 The “Route Trace” indicator illuminates
and the route trace starts.
3
Check that the traveled line is displayed.
When the cursor is placed over an icon
on the map screen, the name bar is
displayed on the upper part of the
screen. If “Info” appears on the right
side of the name bar, detailed information can be displayed.
1
Place the cursor over an icon.
2
Select “Info”.
8
POI information
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
■STOP RECORDING THE ROUTE
DISPLAYING INFORMATION
ABOUT THE ICON WHERE
THE CURSOR IS SET
TRACE
1
2
Select “Route Trace” again.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
“Yes”: Select to keep the recorded
route trace.
“No”: Select to erase the recorded
route trace.
Memory point information
INFORMATION
● The traveled route can be stored up to
124 miles (200 km).
275
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
Destination information
STANDARD MAP ICONS
Icon
Name
Island
Park
No.
Function
Industry
Select to register as a memory point.
To change the icon, name, etc.:
→P.312
Business facility
Select to set as a destination.
Airport
Select to call the registered number.
Select to delete destination or memory point.
Select to display the edit memory
point screen.
INFORMATION
● Even when traffic information is not currently being received, traffic information
and “Info” will be displayed for a while
after traffic information has been
received.
Military
University
Hospital
Stadium
Shopping mall
Golf
276
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
4. TRAFFIC INFORMATION
Traffic data can be received via HD or
Entune App Suite to display traffic information on the map screen.
1
2
3
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC
INFORMATION
A list of current traffic information can
be displayed along with information on
the incident’s distance and position relative to the vehicle.
Press the “APPS” button.
1
Display the “Traffic
screen. (→P.277)
2
3
Select “Traffic Event List”.
Information”
Select the desired traffic information.
“On Current Road”: Select to display traffic information for the current road.
“On Current Route”: Select to display
traffic information for the set route.
Select “Traffic”.
Select the desired item.
 When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.
4
Check that the traffic information is displayed.
8
Function
Page
Select to display a list of
current traffic information.
277
Select to display a map
with predictive traffic data.
278
Select to display traffic
along the saved routes.
278
“Detail”: Select to display detailed traffic
information.
277
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
No.
1. BASIC OPERATION
DISPLAYING PREDICTIVE
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
MY TRAFFIC ROUTES
A map with predictive traffic data can
be displayed.
1
2
3
Display the “Traffic
screen. (→P.277)
Information”
Traffic information along the saved
routes can be displayed. To use this
function, it is necessary to register a
route. (→P.325)
1
Display the “Traffic
screen. (→P.277)
2
Select “My Traffic Routes”.
Select “Predictive Traffic Map”.
Scroll the map to the desired point and
set the time of predictive traffic information.
 If map data has been updated, a confirmation screen will be displayed. Select “OK”
or “Do Not Tell Me Again”.
3
 The time of the predictive traffic information can be displayed in 15-minute steps
up to +45 minutes.
“+”: Moves the time forward 15 minutes.
“-”: Moves the time back 15 minutes.
Information”
Select the desired route.
“Options”: Select to add, edit or delete
personal routes. (→P.324)
 If routes have not been registered yet, a
confirmation screen will be displayed.
Select “Yes” to register the route.
4
Select the desired traffic information.
278
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
5
Check that the traffic information is displayed.
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC
INFORMATION ON THE MAP
1
2
3
Select “Options” on the map screen.
Select “Map Information”.
Select “Traffic Information”.
 When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.
“Detail”: Select to display detailed traffic
information.
4
Check that the traffic information is displayed.
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
279
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. BASIC OPERATION
No.
Information/Function
The icons show traffic incident, road
repair, traffic obstacles, etc. Select to
display traffic information and start
voice guidance for the traffic information.
The color of the arrow changes depending on the traffic information received.
The indicator is displayed as follows.
: Traffic information has
been received.
: Traffic information has
been received via HD.
No icon: Traffic information has not
been received.
280
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
1. DESTINATION SEARCH SCREEN
The “Destination” screen enables to search for a destination. To display the “Destination” screen, press the “APPS” button, and select “Navigation” on the “Apps”
screen. Then select “Dest.” on the map screen.
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
281
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
No.
Function
Page
Select to search for a destination by address.
285
Select to search for a destination by point of interest.
286
Select to search for a destination from previously set destinations.
289
Select to search for a destination from a registered entry in “Address
book”.
289
Select to search for a destination by online database.
345
Select to search for a destination from emergency service points.
290
Select to search for a destination by intersection or freeway entrance/
exit.
290
Select to search for a destination by the last displayed map.
292
Select to search for a destination by coordinates.
292
Select to set a destination by home.
284
Select to set a destination from preset destinations.
284
Select to delete set destinations.
304
282
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
2. SEARCH OPERATION
1
Press the “APPS” button.
5
2
Select “Navigation”.
3
4
Select “Dest.”.
Select to adjust the position in smaller increments. (→P.272)
Search for a destination.
Select to register as a memory point.
Select “Go” when the confirm destination screen is displayed.
No.
Function
Select to call the registered number.
283
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
 There are different kinds of methods to
search for a destination. (→P.281)
Select to search for the route.
(→P.293)
If a destination has already been
set, “Go Directly” and “Add to
Route” will be displayed.
“Go Directly”: Select to delete the
existing destination(s) and set a new
one.
“Add to Route”: Select to add a
destination.
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
SELECTING SEARCH AREA
SETTING HOME AS
DESTINATION
The selected state (province) can be
changed to set a destination from a
different state (province) by using
“Address”, “Point of Interest” or
“Intersection & Freeway”.
To use this function, it is necessary to
register a home address. (→P.309)
1
Display the
(→P.283)
2
Select “Address”, “Point of Interest”
or “Intersection & Freeway”.
3
Select “Select State/Province” or
“Change State/Province”.
“Destination”
screen.
 If a state (province) has not been selected
yet, “Select State/Province” is displayed.
4
1
Display the
(→P.283)
2
Select “Go Home”.
“Destination”
screen.
 The navigation system performs a search
for the route and the entire route map is
displayed. (→P.293)
SETTING PRESET
DESTINATIONS AS
DESTINATION
To use this function, it is necessary to
register preset destinations to the
preset screen buttons (1-5). (→P.310)
Select the desired state (province).
1
Display the
(→P.283)
2
Select any of the preset destination
buttons (1-5).
“Destination”
screen.
 To change countries, select the “United
States”, “Canada” or “Mexico” tab.
 For map database information and
updates: →P.332
 The navigation system performs a search
for the route and the entire route map is
displayed. (→P.293)
284
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING BY ADDRESS
There are 2 methods to search for a
destination by address.
1
Display the
(→P.283)
2
3
Select “Address”.
“Destination”
screen.
Function
Page
285
Select to search by street
address.
285
1
2
Select “Street Address”.
3
4
5
6
Enter a street name and select “OK”.
Enter a house number and select
“OK”.
Select the desired street name.
Enter a city name and select “OK”.
Select the desired city name.
INFORMATION
Select “City”.
Enter a city name and select “OK”.
“Last 5 Cities”: Select the city name from
the list of the last 5 cities.
3
4
 If the same address exists, the address
list screen will be displayed. Select the
desired address.
 If the same address exists, the address
list screen will be displayed. Select the
desired address.
SEARCHING BY CITY
1
2
Enter a house number and select
“OK”.
● A street name can be searched using
only the body part of its name.
For example: S WESTERN AVE
• A search can be performed by entering
“S WESTERN AVE”, “WESTERN AVE”
or “WESTERN”.
Select the desired city name.
Enter a street name and select “OK”.
285
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to search by city.
Select the desired street name.
SEARCHING BY STREET
ADDRESS
Select the desired search method.
No.
5
6
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING BY NAME
SEARCHING BY POINT OF
INTEREST
There are 3 methods to search for a
destination by Points of Interest.
1
Display the
(→P.283)
2
3
Select “Point of Interest”.
“Destination”
screen.
1
2
3
Select “Name”.
Enter a POI name and select “OK”.
Select the desired POI.
Select the desired search method.
No.
No.
Function
Page
Select to search by name.
286
Select to search by category.
287
Select to search by phone
number.
288
Function
Page
Select to search for POI in
the desired city.
287
Select to search for POI
from the category list.
287
 When entering the name of a specific POI,
and there are 2 or more sites with the
same name, the list screen will be displayed. Select the desired POI.
INFORMATION
● To search for a facility name using multiple search words, put a space between
each word.
286
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
■SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH
1
2
SEARCHING BY CATEGORY
Select “City”.
Enter a city name and select “OK”.
“Any City”: Select to cancel the city setting.
3
4
1
2
Select “Category”.
Select the desired search point.
Select the desired city name.
Select the desired POI.
■SELECTING FROM THE CATEGORIES
1
2
Select “Category”.
No.
Select the desired category.
Function
Select to set the search point from
near the current position.
Select to search for POIs along the
set route.
Select to set the search point from
near a city center. (→P.288)
Select to set the search point from
near a destination.
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
 If there is more than 1 detailed item of the
selected category, the detailed list will be
displayed.
Select the desired POI category.
“List All Categories”: Select to display all
POI categories.
3
Select the desired POI.
 If there is more than 1 detailed item of the
selected category, the detailed list will be
displayed.
287
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
8
20:05
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
“List All Categories”: Select to display all
POI categories.
“Favorite POI Categories”: Select to use
the 6 POIs that have been previously set.
(→P.319)
4
Select the desired POI.
1
2
Select “Phone #”.
Enter a phone number and select
“OK”.
 If there is more than 1 site with the same
number, the list screen will be displayed.
INFORMATION
● The names of POIs located within
approximately 200 miles (320 km) from
the selected search point can be displayed.
INFORMATION
When “Near a City Center in XX*” is selected
1
2
SEARCHING BY PHONE
NUMBER
● If there is no match for the entered
phone number, a list of identical numbers with different area codes will be displayed.
Select “Near a City Center in XX”.
Enter a city name and select “OK”.
“Last 5 Cities”: Select the city name from
the list of the last 5 cities.
3
4
Select the desired city name.
5
Follow the steps from 3 onward in
“SEARCHING
BY
CATEGORY”.
(→P.287)
Select “OK” when the city center map
screen is displayed.
*:XX represents the selected search area
name.
INFORMATION
● If the navigation system has never been
used, selecting the city name from “Last
5 Cities” will not be available.
288
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING FROM
PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS
1
Display the
(→P.283)
2
3
Select “Previous Destinations”.
“Destination”
SEARCHING BY ADDRESS
BOOK
screen.
Select the desired destination.
“Previous Start Point”: Select to display
the start point map of the previous guided
route.
“Delete”: Select to delete the previous
destination. (→P.317)
To use this function, it is necessary to
register an address book entry.
(→P.312)
1
Display the
(→P.283)
2
3
Select “Address Book”.
“Destination”
screen.
Select the desired address book entry.
 “Options”: Select to register or edit
address book entries. (→P.313)
8
INFORMATION
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
● The previous start point and up to 100
previously set destinations are displayed
on the screen.
289
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING BY
EMERGENCY
1
Display the
(→P.283)
2
3
Select “Emergency”.
“Destination”
screen.
There are 2 methods to search for a
destination by Intersection & Freeway.
Select the desired emergency category.
4
SEARCHING BY
INTERSECTION AND
FREEWAY
1
Display the
(→P.283)
2
3
Select “Intersection & Freeway”.
“Destination”
screen.
Select the desired method.
Select the desired destination.
INFORMATION
● The navigation system does not guide in
areas where route guidance is unavailable. (→P.330)
No.
Function
Page
Select to search by intersection.
291
Select to search by freeway entrance/exit.
291
290
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING BY
INTERSECTION
1
2
Select “Intersection”.
3
SEARCHING BY FREEWAY
ENTRANCE/EXIT
1
2
Select “Freeway Entrance / Exit”.
Select the desired street name.
3
4
Select the desired freeway.
4
Enter the name of the second intersecting street and select “OK”.
5
5
Select the desired street name.
Enter a freeway entrance or exit name
and select “OK”.
6
Select the desired entrance or exit
name.
Enter the name of the first intersecting
street which is located near the destination and select “OK”.
 If the 2 streets cross at more than 1 intersection in a city, the list of intersections will
be displayed.
Enter a freeway name and select
“OK”.
Select “Entrance” or “Exit”.
291
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
INFORMATION
● Be sure to use the complete name of the
freeway or highway, including the
hyphen, when entering the destination.
Freeways and interstates use an “I” (I405). US highways use the state designation before the number (CA-118).
8
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING BY MAP
SEARCHING BY
COORDINATES
By selecting “Map” the last displayed
location is displayed again on the map
screen. You can search for a destination from this map.
1
Display the
(→P.283)
2
3
Select “Map”.
“Destination”
screen.
1
Display the
(→P.283)
2
3
Select “Coordinates”.
“Destination”
screen.
Enter the latitude and longitude and
select “OK”.
Scroll the map to the desired point and
select “Go to ”.
“Adjust Location”: Select to adjust the
position in smaller increments. (→P.272)
 If a destination has already been set, “Go
to
” and “Add to Route” will be displayed.
“Go to ”: Select to delete the existing
destination(s) and set a new one.
“Add to Route”: Select to add a destination.
 The navigation system performs a search
for the route and the entire route map is
displayed. (→P.293)
292
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
3. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE
When the destination is set, the entire
route map from the current position to
the destination is displayed.
STARTING ROUTE
GUIDANCE
1
Select “OK” to start guidance.
No.
Select the desired route from 3 possible routes. (→P.294)
change
the
● Be sure to obey traffic regulations and
keep road conditions in mind while driving. If a traffic sign on the road has been
changed, the route guidance may not
indicate such changed information.
INFORMATION
Information/Function
Select to
(→P.295)
WARNING
route.
Current position
Destination point
Type of route and its distance
Distance of the entire route
Select to start guidance.
If “OK” is selected and held until a
beep sounds, demo mode will start.
Press the “HOME” or “APPS” button to end demo mode.
293
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to display a list of the turns required to reach the destination.
(→P.295)
● The route for returning may not be the
same as that for going.
● The route guidance to the destination
may not be the shortest route or a route
without traffic congestion.
● Route guidance may not be available if
there is no road data for the specified
location.
● When setting the destination on a map
with a scale more than 0.5 mile (800 m),
the map scale changes to 0.5 miles (800
m) automatically. If this occurs, set the
destination again.
● If a destination that is not located on a
road is set, the vehicle will be guided to
the point on a road nearest to the destination. The road nearest to the selected
point is set as the destination.
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
3 ROUTES SELECTION
■DISPLAYING 3 ROUTES INFORMATION
1
2
Select “3 Routes”.
Select the desired route.
No.
1
2
Select “Info”.
Check that the “3 Route Information”
screen is displayed.
Function
Select to display the quickest route.
No.
Information
Select to display the route that is the
shortest distance to the set destination.
Time necessary for the entire trip
Select to display the alternative
route.
Distance of the toll road
Select to display the information
about the 3 routes. (→P.294)
Distance of the freeway
Distance of the entire trip
Distance of the ferry trip
294
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
DISPLAYING TURN LIST
EDITING ROUTE
A list of turn information from the current position to the destination can be
displayed.
1
2
1
2
Select “Turn List”.
Check that the turn list is displayed.
No.
Destinations can be added, reordered
or deleted, and conditions for the route
to the destination can be changed.
Information
Select “Edit Route”.
Select the desired item.
No.
Page
Current position
Select to add destinations.
304
Distance to the next turn
Select to delete destinations.
304
Select to reorder destinations.
304
Select to set route preferences.
305
Select to change route
type.
305
Turn direction at the intersection
Select to display the map of the selected point.
INFORMATION
● However, not all road names on the
route may appear on the list. If a road
changes its name without requiring a
turn (such as on a street that runs
through 2 or more cities), the name
change will not appear on the list. The
street names will be displayed in order
from the starting point, along with the
distance to the next turn.
295
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Function
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
INFORMATION
● Even if the “Freeways” indicator is
dimmed, the route cannot avoid including a freeway in some cases. (→P.305)
● If the calculated route includes a trip by
ferry, the route guidance shows a sea
route. After traveling by ferry, the current
position may be incorrect. Upon reception of GPS signals, it is automatically
corrected.
PAUSING GUIDANCE
1
2
Select “Options” on the map screen.
Select “Pause Guidance”.
RESUMING GUIDANCE
1
Select “Resume Guidance”.
296
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN
During the route guidance, various
types of guidance screens can be displayed depending on conditions.
SCREEN FOR ROUTE
GUIDANCE
CHANGING ROUTE
INFORMATION BAR
When the vehicle is on the guidance
route, the route information bar displays the current street name or the
distance with the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination.
1
Select the route information bar (
) or
the route information button ( ) to
change the display of the route information bar.
No.
Information/Function
Distance to the next turn and an arrow indicating the turning direction
Guidance route
No.
Current position
8
Information/Function
INFORMATION
● If the vehicle goes off the guidance
route, the route is searched again.
● For some areas, the roads have not
been completely digitized in our database. For this reason, the route guidance may select a road that should not
be traveled on.
● When arriving at the set destination the
destination name will be displayed on
the upper part of the screen.
Select to change the display between the current street name and
the distance with the estimated travel/arrival time.
297
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to change the display between the estimated travel time and
the estimated arrival time.
Current street name or route information
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
ROUTE OVERVIEW
INFORMATION
● When the vehicle is on the guidance
route, the distance measured along the
route is displayed. Travel time and
arrival time are calculated based on the
average speed for the specified speed
limit.
● When the vehicle gets off the guidance
route, the arrow facing the destination is
displayed instead of the estimated
travel/arrival time.
● The route information bar fills from left to
right as the vehicle progresses on the
route.
The entire route from the current position to the destination can be displayed
during the route guidance.
1
2
3
Select “Options” on the map screen.
Select “Route Overview”.
Check that the entire route map is displayed.
DISTANCE AND TIME TO
DESTINATION
When driving on the guidance route
with more than 1 destination set, a list
of the distance with estimated travel/
arrival time from the current position to
each destination is displayed.
1
2
 For details about this screen: →P.293
Select the route information bar.
Check that the list of the distance and
time is displayed.
 By selecting one of the number buttons,
the desired route information is displayed.
298
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
WHEN APPROACHING
FREEWAY EXIT OR JUNCTION
DURING FREEWAY DRIVING
During freeway driving, the freeway
exit information screen will be displayed.
No./
Icon
Information/Function
Distance and time from the current
position to the freeway exit/rest
area.
Name of the freeway exit/rest area.
POIs that are close to a freeway exit.
Select to display the nearest freeway exits/rest areas from the current
position.
No.
Information/Function
Next exit or junction name
Distance from the current position to
the exit or junction
Select to hide the freeway guidance
screen. To return to the freeway
guidance screen, select
.
Remaining distance bar to the guidance point
Select to scroll to farther freeway
exits/rest areas.
Select to scroll to closer freeway
exits/rest areas.
299
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to display the selected map of
the exit vicinity.
When the vehicle approaches an exit
or junction, the freeway guidance
screen will be displayed.
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
TOLLGATE GUIDANCE
When the vehicle approaches a tollgate, the tollgate view will be displayed.
No.
WHEN APPROACHING
INTERSECTION
When the vehicle approaches an intersection, the intersection guidance
screen will be displayed.
Information/Function
Distance from the current position to
the tollgate
No.
Information/Function
Next street name
Select to hide the tollgate guidance
screen. To return to the tollgate
guidance screen, select
.
Remaining distance bar to the guidance point
Distance to the intersection
Select to hide the intersection guidance screen. To return to the intersection guidance screen, select
.
Remaining distance bar to the guidance point
300
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
TURN LIST SCREEN
1
2
TURN-BY-TURN ARROW
SCREEN
Select “Turn List” on the “Map Mode”
screen. (→P.269)
Check that the turn list screen is displayed.
No.
On this screen, information about the
next turn on the guidance route can be
displayed.
1
Select “Turn-by-Turn Arrow” on the
“Map Mode” screen. (→P.269)
2
Check that the turn-by-turn arrow
screen is displayed.
Information/Function
Turn direction
Distance between turns
Next street or destination name
No.
Information/Function
8
Exit number or street name
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Turn direction
Distance to the next turn
301
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS
As the vehicle approaches an intersection, or point, where maneuvering the
vehicle is necessary, the system’s
voice guidance will provide various
messages.
WARNING
● Be sure to obey the traffic regulations
and keep the road condition in mind
especially when you are driving on IPD
roads (roads that are not completely digitized in our database). The route guidance may not have the updated
information such as the direction of a
one way street.
INFORMATION
● If a voice guidance command cannot be
heard, select
on the map screen
to hear it again.
● To adjust the voice guidance volume:
→P.63
● Voice guidance may be made early or
late.
● If the system cannot determine the current position correctly, you may not hear
voice guidance or may not see the magnified intersection on the screen.
302
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
3. EDITING ROUTE
1
Press the “APPS” button.
5
Select the item to be set.
No.
Function
Page
2
Select “Navigation”.
Select to add destinations.
304
3
4
Select “Options”.
Select to delete destinations.
304
Select to reorder destinations.
304
Select to set route preferences.
305
Select to change route
type.
305
Select to set detours.
306
Select to start from adjacent road.
307
Select “Edit Route”.
Check that the entire route map is displayed. (→P.293)
303
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
6
8
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
ADDING DESTINATIONS
1
Display the
(→P.303)
2
3
Select “Add”.
4
“Edit
Route”
DELETING DESTINATIONS
screen.
Search for an additional destination in
the same way as a destination search.
(→P.281)
Select “Add Destination Here” to insert the new destination into the route.
1
Display the
(→P.303)
2
3
Select “Delete”.
“Edit Route”
screen.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
 When more than 1 destination has been
set, a list will be displayed on the screen.
Select the item(s) to be deleted.
“Delete All”: Select to delete all destinations on the list.
 If more than 1 destination has been set,
the system will recalculate the route(s) to
the set destination(s) as necessary.
REORDERING
DESTINATIONS
When more than 1 destination has
been set, the arrival order of the destinations can be changed.
1
Display the
(→P.303)
2
3
Select “Reorder”.
“Edit
Route”
screen.
Select the desired destination and select “Move Up” or “Move Down” to
change the arrival order. Then select
“OK”.
304
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
SETTING ROUTE
PREFERENCES
SELECTING ROUTE TYPE
The conditions to determine the route
can be selected from various choices
such as freeways, toll roads, ferries,
etc.
1
Display the
(→P.303)
2
3
Select “Preferences”.
“Edit
Route”
1
Display the
(→P.303)
2
3
Select “Route Type”.
“Edit
Route”
screen.
Select the desired route type.
screen.
Select the desired route preferences
and select “OK”.
 During driving, the route guidance starts
after selecting the desired route type.
4
The entire route from the starting point
to the destination is displayed.
 For details about this screen: →P.293
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
 When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.
305
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
DETOUR SETTING
INFORMATION
During the route guidance, the route
can be changed to detour around a
section of the route where a delay is
caused by road repairs, an accident,
etc.
1
Display the
(→P.303)
2
3
Select “Detour”.
“Edit
Route”
screen.
Select the desired detour distance.
No.
Function
Select to detour within 1 mile of the
current position.
● This picture shows an example of how
the system would guide around a delay
caused by a traffic jam.
This position indicates the location of a
traffic jam caused by road repairs, an
accident, etc.
This route indicates the detour suggested by the system.
● When the vehicle is on a freeway, the
detour distance selections are 5, 15 and
25 miles (or 5, 15 and 25 km if units are
in km).
● The system may not be able to calculate
a detour route depending on the
selected distance and surrounding road
conditions.
Select to detour within 3 miles of the
current position.
Select to detour within 5 miles of the
current position.
Select to detour on the entire route.
Select to make the system search
for the route based on traffic congestion information received from
traffic information. (→P.277)
306
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
STARTING FROM ADJACENT
ROAD
When a freeway and a surface road
run in parallel, the system may show
the guidance route going on the freeway while driving on the surface road,
or vice versa.
If this happens, you can instantly
choose the adjacent road for the route
guidance.
1
Display the
(→P.303)
2
Select “Start from Adjacent Road”.
“Edit Route”
screen.
INFORMATION
● When there is no adjacent road, this
screen button will not be displayed.
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
307
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
4. MEMORY POINTS
1. MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS
Home, preset destinations, address
book entries, areas to avoid can be set
as memory points. The registered
points can be used as the destinations.
(→P.281)
4
Select the desired item to be set.
Registered areas to avoid, will be
avoided when the system searches for
a route.
1
2
3
Press the “APPS” button.
Select “Setup”.
Select “Navigation”.
No.
Function
Page
Select to set home.
309
Select to set preset destinations.
310
Select to set the address
book.
312
Select to set areas to
avoid.
315
Select to delete previous
destinations.
317
Select to set detailed navigation settings.
318
308
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
4. MEMORY POINTS
EDITING HOME
SETTING UP HOME
If home has been registered, that information can be recalled by selecting
“Go Home” on the “Destination”
screen. (→P.284)
1
Display the “Navigation
screen. (→P.308)
2
3
Select “Home”.
1
2
Select “Edit”.
Select the desired item to be edited.
Settings”
Select the desired item to be set.
No.
No.
Function
Page
309
Select to edit home.
309
Select to delete home.
309
3
Page
Select to edit the home
name.
314
Select to set display of the
home name on/off.
⎯
Select to edit location information.
314
Select to edit the phone
number.
314
Select to change the icon
to be displayed on the map
screen.
313
Select “OK”.
DELETING HOME
REGISTERING HOME
1
2
Select “Set Home”.
3
Select “OK” when the editing home
screen appears.
Select the desired item to search for
the location. (→P.281)
1
2
Select “Delete”.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
309
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to register home.
Function
4. MEMORY POINTS
REGISTERING PRESET
DESTINATIONS
SETTING UP PRESET
DESTINATIONS
If a preset destination has been registered, that information can be recalled
by using preset destinations on the
“Destination” screen. (→P.284)
1
Display the “Navigation
screen. (→P.308)
2
3
Select “Preset Destinations”.
Settings”
1
2
Select “Set”.
3
Select a position for this preset destination.
4
Select “OK” when the editing preset
destination screen appears. (→P.311)
Select the desired item to search for
the location. (→P.281)
Select the desired item.
INFORMATION
No.
Function
Page
Select to register a preset
destination.
310
Select to edit a preset destination.
311
Select to delete a preset
destination.
311
● Up to 5 preset destinations can be registered.
310
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
4. MEMORY POINTS
EDITING PRESET
DESTINATIONS
1
2
3
Select “Edit”.
Select the desired preset destination.
1
2
Select “Delete”.
3
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
Select the item to be edited.
No.
Function
Page
Select to edit the preset
destination name.
314
Select to set display of the
preset destination name
on/off.
⎯
Select to edit location information.
314
Select to edit the phone
number.
314
Select to change the icon
to be displayed on the map
screen.
313
Select the preset destination to be deleted and select “Delete”.
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
4
DELETING PRESET
DESTINATIONS
Select “OK”.
311
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
4. MEMORY POINTS
REGISTERING ADDRESS
BOOK ENTRIES
SETTING UP ADDRESS
BOOK
Points on the map can be registered.
1
Display the “Navigation
screen. (→P.308)
2
3
Select “Address Book”.
Settings”
Select the desired item.
1
2
Select “New”.
3
Select “OK” when the editing address
book entry screen appears. (→P.313)
Select the desired item to search for
the location. (→P.281)
INFORMATION
● Up to 100 address book entries can be
registered.
No.
Function
Page
Select to register address
book entries.
312
Select to edit address book
entries.
313
Select to delete address
book entries.
314
312
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
4. MEMORY POINTS
■CHANGING THE ICON
EDITING ADDRESS BOOK
ENTRIES
The icon, name, location and/or phone
number of a registered address book
entry can be edited.
1
2
3
1
2
Select “Edit” next to the “Icon”.
Select the desired icon.
Select “Edit”.
Select the desired address book entry.
Select the item to be edited.
 Change pages by selecting the “Page 1”,
“Page 2” or “With Sound” tab.
“With Sound”: Select the memory points
with a sound
No.
Page
Select to edit the address
book entry name.
314
Select to set display of the
address book entry name
on/off.
⎯
Select to edit location information.
314
Select to edit the phone
number.
314
Select to change the icon
to be displayed on the map
screen.
313
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
4
Function
Select “OK”.
313
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
4. MEMORY POINTS
When the “With Sound” tab is selected
1
2
A sound for some address book entries
can be set. When the vehicle approaches the location of the address
book entry, the selected sound will be
heard.
1
2
■CHANGING THE NAME
Select “Edit” next to “Name”.
Enter a name and select “OK”.
■CHANGING THE LOCATION
1
2
Select the “With Sound” tab.
Select the desired sound icon.
: Select to play the sound.
 When “Bell (with Direction)” is selected,
select an arrow to adjust the direction and
select “OK”.
Select “Edit” next to “Location”.
Scroll the map to the desired point
(→P.272) and select “OK”.
■CHANGING PHONE NUMBER
1
Select “Edit” next to “Phone #”.
2
Enter the phone number and select
“OK”.
DELETING ADDRESS BOOK
ENTRIES
1
2
Select “Delete”.
3
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
INFORMATION
Select the item to be deleted and select
“Delete”.
● The bell sounds only when the vehicle
approaches this point in the direction
that has been set.
314
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
4. MEMORY POINTS
REGISTERING AREAS TO
AVOID
SETTING UP AREAS TO
AVOID
Areas to be avoided because of traffic
jams, construction work or other reasons can be registered as “Areas to
Avoid”.
1
Display the “Navigation
screen. (→P.308)
2
3
Select “Areas to Avoid”.
Settings”
1
2
Select “New”.
3
Select either
or
to
change the size of the area to be avoided and select “OK”.
4
Select “OK” when the editing area to
avoid screen appears.
Select the desired item to search for
the location. (→P.281)
Select the desired item.
No.
Page
Select to register areas to
avoid.
315
Select to edit areas to
avoid.
316
Select to delete areas to
avoid.
317
8
INFORMATION
● If a destination is entered in the area to
avoid or the route calculation cannot be
made without running through the area
to avoid, a route passing through the
area to be avoided may be shown.
● Up to 10 locations can be registered as
points/areas to avoid.
315
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Function
4. MEMORY POINTS
■CHANGING THE NAME
EDITING AREAS TO AVOID
The name, location and/or area size of
a registered area can be edited.
1
2
3
1
2
Select “Edit” next to “Name”.
Enter a name and select “OK”.
Select “Edit”.
■CHANGING THE LOCATION
Select the area and select “OK”.
1
2
Select the item to be edited.
Select “Edit” next to “Location”.
Scroll the map to the desired point
(→P.272) and select “OK”.
■CHANGING THE AREA SIZE
No.
Function
Page
Select to edit the name of
the area to avoid.
316
Select to set display of the
area to avoid name on/off.
⎯
Select to edit area location.
316
Select to edit area size.
316
Select to set the area to
avoid function on/off.
4
1
Select “Edit” next to “Size”.
2
Select either
or
to
change the size of the area to be avoided and select “OK”.
⎯
Select “OK”.
316
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
4. MEMORY POINTS
DELETING AREAS TO AVOID
1
2
Select “Delete”.
3
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
Select the area to be deleted and select “Delete”.
DELETING PREVIOUS
DESTINATIONS
Previous destinations can be deleted.
1
Display the “Navigation
screen. (→P.308)
2
3
Select “Delete Previous Dest.”.
Settings”
Select the previous destination to be
deleted and select “Delete”.
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
4
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
317
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
5. SETUP
1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS
Settings are available for pop-up information, favorite POI categories, low
fuel warning, etc.
1
Press the “APPS” button.
2
3
4
5
6
Select “Setup”.
SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION
SETTINGS
Select “Navigation”.
Select “Detailed Navi. Settings”.
Select the items to be set.
Select “OK”.
318
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
5. SETUP
No.
Function
Page
Select to set the voice guidance for the next street
name on/off.
⎯
Select to set IPD road guidance on/off.
⎯
Select to set favorite POI
categories that are used for
POI selection to display on
the map screen.
319
Select to adjust the current
position mark manually or
to adjust miscalculation of
the distance caused by tire
replacement.
320
Select to set display of popup information on/off.
⎯
Select to set display of low
fuel warning on/off.
321
Select to reset all setup
items.
⎯
FAVORITE POI CATEGORIES
(SELECT POI ICONS)
Up to 6 POI icons, which are used for
selecting POIs on the map screen, can
be selected as favorites.
1
Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”
screen. (→P.318)
2
3
Select “Favorite POI Categories”.
Select the category to be changed.
“Default”: Select to set the default categories.
4
Select the desired POI icon.
319
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“List All Categories”: Select to display all
POI categories.
5
8
Select the desired POI category.
5. SETUP
■POSITION/DIRECTION
CURRENT POSITION/TIRE
CHANGE CALIBRATION
When driving, the current position
mark will be automatically corrected by
GPS signals. If GPS reception is poor
due to location, the current position
mark can be adjusted manually.
The current position mark can be adjusted manually. Miscalculation of the
distance caused by tire replacement
can also be adjusted.
1
Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”
screen. (→P.318)
2
3
Select “Calibration”.
Select the desired item.
CALIBRA-
TION
1
2
Select “Position / Direction”.
3
Select an arrow to adjust the direction
of the current position mark and select
“OK”.
Scroll the map to the desired point
(→P.272) and select “OK”.
 For additional information on the accuracy of a current position: →P.329
320
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
5. SETUP
■TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION
■SEARCHING GAS STATION IN LOW
The tire change calibration function will
be used when replacing the tires. This
function will adjust miscalculation
caused by the circumference difference between the old and new tires.
1
Select “Tire Change”.
 The message appears and the quick distance calibration starts automatically.
FUEL WARNING
A nearby gas station can be selected
as a destination.
1
Select “Yes” when the low fuel warning appears.
2
Select the desired nearby gas station.
3
Select “Enter
tion.
INFORMATION
● If this procedure is not performed when
the tires are replaced, the current position mark may be incorrectly displayed.
LOW FUEL WARNING POP-UP
When the fuel level is low, a warning
message will pop up on the screen.
Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”
screen. (→P.318)
2
Select “Low Fuel Warning Pop-up”.
8
“Info”: Select to display gas station information. (→P.275)
321
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
1
” to set as a destina-
5. SETUP
2. TRAFFIC SETTINGS
Traffic information such as traffic congestion or traffic incident warnings can
be made available.
1
Press the “APPS” button.
2
3
4
5
Select “Setup”.
SCREEN FOR TRAFFIC
SETTINGS
Select “Traffic”.
Select the items to be set.
Select “OK”.
No.
Function
Select to set specific routes (such as
frequently used routes) on which
you wish to receive traffic information. (→P.324)
Select to set the avoid traffic function auto/manual. (→P.323)
Select to set the usage of traffic information for the estimated arrival
time on/off.
Select to set the display of an arrow
of free flowing traffic on/off.
Select to set to on/off whether to
consider the predictive traffic information (→P.278) with estimated arrival time and detoured route
search.
322
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
5. SETUP
No.
Function
Select to set of traffic incident voice
warning on/off.
Select to reset all setup items.
AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC
1
Display the “Traffic Settings” screen.
(→P.322)
2
3
Select “Avoid Traffic”.
Select the desired item.
No.
Function
Select to automatically change
routes when congestion information
of the guidance route has been received.
Select to not reroute when congestion information for the guidance
route has been received.
4
Select “OK”.
323
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to select manually whether or
not to change routes when congestion information of the guidance
route has been received. In this
mode, a screen will appear to ask if
you wish to reroute.
5. SETUP
■CHANGING THE ROUTE MANUALLY
When the navigation system calculates a new route, the following screen
will be displayed.
1
Select the desired item.
No.
MY TRAFFIC ROUTES
Specific routes (such as frequently
used routes) on which you wish to receive traffic information can be registered as “My Traffic Routes”. A route is
set by defining a start point and end
point, and can be adjusted by setting
up to 2 preferred roads.
1
Display the “Traffic Settings” screen.
(→P.322)
2
3
Select “My Traffic Routes”.
Select the desired item.
Function
Select to start route guidance using
the new route.
Select to confirm the new route and
current route on the map.
Select to continue the current route
guidance.
No.
Function
Page
Select to register personal
routes.
325
Select to edit personal
routes.
325
Select to delete personal
routes.
326
324
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
5. SETUP
REGISTERING PERSONAL
ROUTES
1
2
Select “New”.
3
4
5
Enter the name and select “OK”.
EDITING PERSONAL ROUTES
Select “Edit” next to “Name”.
1
2
Select “Edit”.
3
Select “Edit” next to the item to be edited.
Select the desired traffic route.
Select “Edit” next to “Start”.
Select the desired item to search for
the location. (→P.281)
8
Function
Page
Select to edit the name of
the personal route.
6
Select “Edit” next to “End”.
Select to edit start location.
7
Select the desired item to search for
the location. (→P.281)
Select to edit end location.
8
Select “OK” when the editing traffic
route screen appears.
 The routes can be adjusted by setting preferred roads. (→P.326)
Select to see and modify
the entire route.
4
325
326
Select “OK”.
 The entire route map will be displayed.
INFORMATION
● Up to 5 routes can be registered.
325
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
No.
5. SETUP
DELETING PERSONAL
ROUTES
SETTING PREFERRED ROADS
“My Traffic Routes” can be adjusted by
setting up to 2 preferred roads.
1
2
Select “Delete”.
3
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
Select the traffic route to be deleted
and select “Delete”.
1
Select “Set Preferred Roads”.
2
Select the desired item.
No.
Function
Page
Select to add preferred
roads.
327
Select to modify preferred
roads.
327
Select to delete preferred
roads.
328
326
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
5. SETUP
■ADDING PREFERRED ROADS
■MODIFYING PREFERRED ROADS
1
1
2
Select “Modify”.
3
Scroll the map to the desired point and
select “OK”.
Select “Add”.
 If two preferred roads are already set,
select “Yes” and delete a preferred road
before add a new one.
2
3
Select the preferred road to be modified if 2 preferred roads have been set.
Scroll the map to the desired point and
select “OK”.
Select “OK” to use this road.
“Next”: Select to change road.
4
Select “Add Here” for the desired location.
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
4
Select “OK” to use this road.
“Next”: Select to change road.
 If a preferred road is already set, a second
preferred road can be added anywhere
between the start point, the end point and
the existing preferred road.
327
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
5. SETUP
■DELETING PREFERRED ROADS
1
2
Select “Delete”.
Select the preferred road to be deleted
if 2 preferred roads have been set.
“Delete All”: Select to delete all preferred
roads on the list.
3
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
328
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
1. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)
LIMITATIONS OF THE
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This navigation system calculates the
current position using satellite signals,
various vehicle signals, map data, etc.
However, an accurate position may not
be shown depending on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circumstances.
The Global Positioning System (GPS) developed and operated by the U.S. Department of Defense provides an accurate
current position, normally using 4 or more
satellites, and in some case 3 satellites.
The GPS system has a certain level of inaccuracy. While the navigation system
compensates for this most of the time, occasional positioning errors of up to 300 ft.
(100 m) can and should be expected. Generally, position errors will be corrected
within a few seconds.
When the vehicle is receiving signals from
satellites, the “GPS” mark appears at the
top left of the screen.
The GPS signal may be physically obstructed, leading to inaccurate vehicle position on the map screen. Tunnels, tall
buildings, trucks, or even the placement of
objects on the instrument panel may obstruct the GPS signals.
The GPS satellites may not send signals
due to repairs or improvements being
made to them.
Even when the navigation system is receiving clear GPS signals, the vehicle position may not be shown accurately or
inappropriate route guidance may occur in
some cases.
NOTICE
329
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
● The installation of window tinting may
obstruct the GPS signals. Most window
tinting contains some metallic content
that will interfere with GPS signal reception of the antenna in the instrument
panel. We advise against the use of window tinting on vehicles equipped with
navigation systems.
6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
 Accurate current position may not be
shown in the following cases:
• When driving on a small angled Yshaped road.
• When driving on a winding road.
• When driving on a slippery road such as
in sand, gravel, snow, etc.
• When driving on a long straight road.
• When freeway and surface streets run in
parallel.
• After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier.
• When a long route is searched during
high speed driving.
• When driving without setting the current
position calibration correctly.
• After repeating a change of direction by
going forward and backward, or turning
on a turntable in a parking lot.
• When leaving a covered parking lot or
parking garage.
• When a roof carrier is installed.
• When driving with tire chains installed.
• When the tires are worn.
• After replacing a tire or tires.
• When using tires that are smaller or
larger than the factory specifications.
• When the tire pressure in any of the 4
tires is not correct.
 If the vehicle cannot receive GPS signals, the current position can be
adjusted manually. For information on
setting the current position calibration:
→P.320
 Inappropriate route guidance may occur in
the following cases:
• When turning at an intersection off the
designated route guidance.
• If you set more than 1 destination but
skip any of them, auto reroute will display a route returning to the destination
on the previous route.
• When turning at an intersection for which
there is no route guidance.
• When passing through an intersection
for which there is no route guidance.
• During auto reroute, the route guidance
may not be available for the next turn to
the right or left.
• During high speed driving, it may take a
long time for auto reroute to operate. In
auto reroute, a detour route may be
shown.
• After auto reroute, the route may not be
changed.
• If an unnecessary U-turn is shown or
announced.
• If a location has multiple names and the
system announces 1 or more of them.
• When a route cannot be searched.
• If the route to your destination includes
gravel, unpaved roads or alleys, the
route guidance may not be shown.
• Your destination point might be shown
on the opposite side of the street.
• When a portion of the route has regulations prohibiting the entry of the vehicle
that vary by time or season or other reasons.
• The road and map data stored in the
navigation system may not be complete
or may not be the latest version.
 After replacing a tire: →P.321
330
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
INFORMATION
● This navigation system uses tire turning
data and is designed to work with factory-specified tires for the vehicle.
Installing tires that are larger or smaller
than the originally equipped diameter
may cause inaccurate display of the current position. The tire pressure also
affects the diameter of the tires, so make
sure that the tire pressure of all 4 tires is
correct.
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
331
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2. MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERED AREA
MAP INFORMATION
5
Check that the map data screen is displayed.
Coverage areas and legal information
can be displayed and map data can be
updated.
1
Press the “APPS” button.
No.
Function
Map version
Select to display map coverage areas.
2
3
4
Select “Navigation”.
Select “Options”.
Select “Map Data”.
Select to display legal information.
INFORMATION
● Map data updates are available for a
fee. Contact your Toyota dealer for further information.
332
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
ABOUT THE MAP DATA
Map data for the navigation system is
contained in a SD card that is inserted
in the SD card slot.
Do not eject the SD card, as doing so
may deactivate the navigation system.
NOTICE
● Do not edit or delete the map data on
the SD card, as doing so may deactivate
the navigation system.
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
INFORMATION
● microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD3C,LLC.
333
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
334
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
9
1
Entune App Suite *
2
1
Entune App Suite OVERVIEW
3
1. Entune App Suite SERVICE ...... 336
BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION ...... 338
PREPARATION BEFORE USING
Entune App Suite .............................. 339
2
5
Entune App Suite OPERATION
1. Entune App Suite ....................... 341
USING Entune App Suite..................... 341
LINKING Entune App Suite AND
NAVIGATION FUNCTION................. 345
Entune App Suite KEYWORD
OPERATION ..................................... 346
3
4
SETUP
6
7
8
9
1. Entune App Suite SETTINGS .... 348
*: Entune Premium Audio only
335
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. Entune App Suite OVERVIEW
1. Entune App Suite SERVICE*
Entune App Suite is a service that enables downloadable applications to be displayed on and operated from the screen. Before Entune App Suite can be used, a
few actions need to be performed first. (→P.339)
USB*1
*: Entune App Suite is available in the contiguous United States, D.C. and Alaska.
336
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. Entune App Suite OVERVIEW
No.
Name
Function
Content provider
Provides content to the system via a cellular phone.
Application server
Provides downloadable application to the system via a cellular
phone.
Cellular phone*2
Using the Entune App Suite application, communication is relayed between the system, the application server and the contents provider.
Applications
Downloaded Entune App Suite applications provide access to
audio/visual content from a content provider when connected
via a compatible phone with a data connection.
Entune App Suite
Contents received, via a cellular phone, from the contents provider servers are displayed on the screen. The system is
equipped with an application player to run applications.
*1: For iPhone only, Entune App Suite can be used while the battery is being charged.
*2: For known compatible phones, refer to http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
INFORMATION
● The actual service availability is dependent on the network condition.
9
Entune App Suite
337
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. Entune App Suite OVERVIEW
INITIALIZING PERSONAL
DATA
BEFORE USING THE
FUNCTION
SUBSCRIPTION
 User registration is required to start using
the Entune App Suite service.
 Entune App suite does not require an activation fee or monthly recurring fees.
 Services requiring a separate contract can
also be used.*
*: For details, refer to
http://www.toyota.com/entune/ or call
1-800-331-4331.
The personal data used in applications
can be removed from the system.
(→P.62)
 The following personal data can be
deleted from the system and returned to
their default settings:
• Downloaded applications
• Downloaded application content
INFORMATION
● Once initialized, data will be erased from
the system. Pay close attention when
initializing the data.
AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE
 Entune App Suite is available in the contiguous United States, D.C. and Alaska.
INFORMATION
● When using Entune App Suite, depending on the details of your cellular phone
contract, data usage fees may apply.
Confirm data usage fees before using
this service.
● In this section, the required actions to
activate applications, connect a cellular
phone to the system and registration
steps for Entune App Suite are
explained. For details regarding Entune
App Suite operations and each of the
applications, refer to
http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
● The actual service availability is dependent on the network condition.
338
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. Entune App Suite OVERVIEW
USER REGISTRATION
PREPARATION BEFORE
USING Entune App Suite
1
Perform user registration at
http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
SETUP REQUIRED TO USE
Entune App Suite
Perform the following actions.
1
User registration
2
Download the Entune App Suite application to your cellular phone.
3
Register the cellular phone to the system.
4
Download Entune App Suite applications to the system.
In order to use Entune App Suite, the following actions must first be performed:
 User registration with a service contract
(→P.339)
 Download the Entune App Suite application onto your cellular phone, and login to
the application. (→P.340)
 Register the cellular phone that the
Entune App Suite application was downloaded to with the system. (→P.340)
9
Entune App Suite
 Register a Bluetooth® phone with the
hands-free system. (→P.43)
 Download Entune App Suite applications
to the system. (→P.342)
339
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1. Entune App Suite OVERVIEW
REGISTERING THE Entune App
Suite APPLICATION
DOWNLOADING Entune App
Suite APPLICATIONS
1
Download the Entune App Suite application to your cellular phone.
2
Run the Entune App Suite application
on your cellular phone.
3
Enter the information required into the
Entune App Suite application. Login to
the application.
INFORMATION
● Applications can only be used when the
Entune App Suite application has been
downloaded to your cellular phone and
the application is running.
● Entune App Suite operational procedures can also be confirmed by visiting
http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
● In order to use applications, it is necessary to run the Entune App Suite application on your cellular phone.
● If an iPhone is connected via Bluetooth®
and USB at the same time, system operation may become unstable. For known
phone compatibility information, refer to
http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
● If an Entune App Suite application is
used while iPod audio is being played
back, system operation may become
unstable.
1
The actions on P.339 need to be performed before Entune App Suite applications can be downloaded.
2
Once your phone is running the Entune
App Suite application with a valid account logged in and is connected to the
system, an on-screen pop-up will be
displayed offering to begin downloading Entune App Suite applications to
the system. After download has started, see P.343 for more information.
340
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. Entune App Suite OPERATION
1. Entune App Suite
2
USING Entune App Suite
Select the desired application button.
Entune App Suite is a service that enables the usable contents of a cellular
phone to be displayed on and operated
from the screen. Before Entune App
Suite can be used, a few actions need
to be performed first. (→P.339)
For details about the function and service of each application, refer to
http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
1
Press the “APPS” button.
No.
Function
Page
Select to activate an application.
⎯
Select to update the application.
342
Select to reorder the applications.
343
9
Entune App Suite
341
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. Entune App Suite OPERATION
3
UPDATING an application
Check that downloading is completed.
When Entune App Suite is activated,
an application may need to be updated. By updating, an application can be
kept to the latest version. When updating the application, it is necessary to
download the updated data and install
it.
■DOWNLOADING THE UPDATED
DATA
If an update is available, “Update” can
be selected.
1
No.
Function
Select to install the update later. The
screen will return to the last displayed screen. Installing the updated data later: →P.343
Select to display detailed information about the updated data.
Select “Update”.
Select to install the updated data.
Follow the steps “INSTALLING THE
UPDATED DATA” from “STEP 2”.
(→P.343)
INFORMATION
2
● Application download time may vary
based on the speed of the cellular network.
● Application download can be resumed
after turning off and back on.
● Future mandatory updates will display
an on-screen pop-up when available.
● Entune App Suite function cannot be
operated while mandatory updates
downloading.
Check that downloading is started.
“Download in Background”: Select to
operate other function while downloading.
“Cancel”: Select to cancel updating.
342
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. Entune App Suite OPERATION
■INSTALLING THE UPDATED DATA
After the downloading is complete,
“Update” will be changed to “Install”.
1
2
Select “Install”.
Select “Continue”.
“Later”: Select to postpone the installation
of the updated data and go back to the previous screen.
3
Check that installing is started.
“Install in Background”: Select to operate other function while installing.
4
REORDERING THE
APPLICATIONS
Order of the applications can be
changed.
1
2
Display the “Apps” screen. (→P.341)
3
Select the desired application to be
moved.
4
Select
or
to move the application, and select “OK”.
Select “Reorder”.
Select “OK” after the installing is complete.
9
INFORMATION
Entune App Suite
● Entune App Suite function cannot be
operated while installing.
343
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. Entune App Suite OPERATION
IF A MESSAGE APPEARS ON THE SCREEN
When problems occur starting up the application player, a message will appear on
the screen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested
corrective action.
Message
Display conditions
Corrective action
“This feature is unavailable
during an emergency call.”
Safety Connect is being implemented.
After Safety Connect is finished, perform the operation
again.
“This feature is unavailable
while transferring contacts.”
Contacts are being transferred manually from the
phonebook.
When the transfer of contacts
is complete, perform the operation.
“Unable to connect to a
Bluetooth* phone. For troubleshooting
assistance,
please visit toyota.com.”
The cellular phone cannot be
connected.
Refer
to
http://
www.toyota.com/entune/ to
confirm if the phone is compatible or not.
“This feature is unavailable
during a handsfree call.”
A hands-free call is in progress.
After the hands-free call is finished, perform the operation.
“To use the services, an active application needs to be
running on your phone. For
more information, please visit
toyota.com.”
The Entune App Suite application cannot be connected
to Bluetooth® SPP.
“Entune App Suite connection
has been lost. Please confirm
your connection.”
Communication was disconnected.
Refer
to
http://
www.toyota.com/entune/ to
confirm if the phone is
Bluetooth® SPP compatible
or not, and then activate the
Entune App Suite application.
After a few moments, retry
the operation.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
344
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. Entune App Suite OPERATION
SETTING A DESTINATION
USING Entune App Suite
LINKING Entune App Suite
AND NAVIGATION FUNCTION
The system can set a destination and
make a hands-free call via Entune App
Suite. For details about the function
and service of each application, refer
to http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
1
2
3
4
5
Press the “APPS” button.
Locations that were searched using
Entune App Suite can be set as a destination.
1
Display the “Web Search” screen.
(→P.345)
2
Select the desired application button to
search.
3
Enter a search term, and select “GO”.
4
5
Select “Map”.
6
Select “OK” to start guidance.
Select “Go to
”.
Select “Navigation”.
Select “Dest.”.
Select “Web Search”.
9
Entune App Suite
Check that the “Web Search” screen is
displayed.
 For the operation of the route guidance
screen and the function of each screen
button: →P.293
345
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. Entune App Suite OPERATION
MAKING A PHONE CALL
USING Entune App Suite
Entune App Suite KEYWORD
OPERATION
Phone calls can be made to locations
which were searched using Entune
App Suite.
1
Display the “Web Search” screen.
(→P.345)
2
Select the desired application button to
search.
3
Enter a search term, and select “GO”.
4
5
Select “Call”.
 The keyboard layout can be changed.
(→P.56)
USING THE SOFTWARE
KEYBOARD
Select “Yes”.
“Cancel”: Select to cancel making a
phone call.
6
Information can be entered to an application by the software keyboard or
voice recognition. For details about the
function and service of each application, refer to
http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
 For phone operation and the function of
each screen button: →P.232
1
2
Display the “Apps” screen. (→P.341)
3
4
Select the character input space.
Select the desired application button.
Enter a search term, and then select
“OK”.
346
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
2. Entune App Suite OPERATION
5
Entering characters will be reflected on
the character input space.
 For details on operating the keyboard:
→P.37
ENTERING A KEYWORD USING
THE VOICE RECOGNITION
FUNCTION
1
2
Display the “Apps” screen. (→P.341)
3
4
Press the talk switch. (→P.138)
Select the desired application button.
When this screen is displayed, say the
desired keyword.
9
 Completion of saying the keyword will be
detected automatically.
Entune App Suite
5
Search results will be displayed on the
screen.
347
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
3. SETUP
1. Entune App Suite SETTINGS
The phone data plan pop-up can be set
when a paid application is downloaded.
1
4
Select the items to be set.
Press the “APPS” button.
No.
Function
Select to set the pop up reminder for
cellular phone data usage.
Select to reset all setup items.
2
3
Select “Setup”.
5
Select “OK”.
Select “Entune”.
348
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
1
INDEX
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
349
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
A
C
AM/FM radio ............................................. 80
Calling on the Bluetooth® phone.............225
Available HD radio™ technology........... 88
By call history ......................................227
Caching a radio program....................... 85
By contacts list.....................................228
Overview ............................................... 80
By dial pad...........................................229
Presetting a station................................ 84
By favorites list ....................................226
Radio broadcast data system................ 86
By “Home” screen................................230
Selecting a station from the list ............. 84
By off hook switch................................230
Traffic announcement (FM radio) .......... 87
Casual speech recognization ..................145
Troubleshooting guide........................... 90
CD .............................................................99
Using HD radio™ technology ................ 88
Overview................................................99
“Apps” screen............................................ 14
Playing an audio CD............................102
Audio remote controls ............................. 121
Playing an MP3/WMA/AAC disc..........102
Audio settings ......................................... 124
Checking around the vehicle...................191
Audio settings screen .......................... 124
Screen display .....................................191
Audio system ............................................ 71
Checking the front and
around the vehicle ...............................192
AUX......................................................... 119
Overview ............................................. 119
Screen display .....................................192
Checking the rear and
around the vehicle ...............................198
B
Basic function...................................... 12, 31
Basic information before operation ........... 32
Basic operation ................................. 72, 264
Bluetooth® audio..................................... 113
Connecting a Bluetooth® device ......... 118
Guide lines displayed on the screen....200
Parking ................................................203
Screen display .....................................198
Checking the sides of the vehicle............195
Screen display .....................................195
Listening to Bluetooth® audio.............. 118
Command list ..........................................146
Overview ............................................. 113
D
Bluetooth® phone message function ...... 235
Calling the message sender................ 239
Checking messages ............................ 237
Receiving a message .......................... 236
Replying to a message
(Quick reply) .................................... 238
Bluetooth® settings ................................... 43
Data services settings .............................155
Setting download methods ..................155
Destination search ..................................281
Destination search screen.......................281
Detailed navigation settings ....................318
Screens for navigation settings ...........318
Driver settings ...........................................65
Manually select linked settings ..............65
350
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
E
F
Editing route............................................ 303
Function index........................................... 28
Adding destinations............................. 304
Deleting destinations........................... 304
G
Detour setting...................................... 306
General settings........................................ 56
Reordering destinations ...................... 304
General settings screen ........................ 56
Selecting route type ............................ 305
GPS (Global positioning system) ............ 329
Setting route preferences.................... 305
Limitations of the navigation
system ............................................. 329
Starting from adjacent road................. 307
Entering letters and numbers/list
screen operation ................................... 37
H
Entering letters and numbers ................ 37
Home screen............................................. 16
List screen............................................. 37
Status display ........................................ 18
Entune App Suite............................ 335, 341
Home screen operation............................. 36
Entune App Suite keyword
operation.......................................... 346
Linking Entune App Suite and
navigation function........................... 345
Using Entune App Suite ...................... 341
Entune App Suite operation.................... 341
Entune App Suite overview..................... 336
Entune App Suite service ....................... 336
Before using the function .................... 338
Preparation before using
Entune App Suite............................. 339
I
Information .............................................. 151
Initial screen.............................................. 32
Internet radio............................................. 98
Listening to internet radio ...................... 98
iPod......................................................... 108
iPod audio ........................................... 112
iPod video............................................ 112
Overview ............................................. 108
Entune App Suite settings ...................... 348
Estimated course line display mode ....... 173
Parking ................................................ 174
Screen description .............................. 173
L
Linking multi-information display and
navigation system..................................42
351
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
M
O
Maintenance ............................................. 66
Operating information..............................126
Map database version and
covered area ....................................... 332
CD player and disc ..............................127
About the map data ............................. 333
File information ....................................130
Map information................................... 332
iPod .....................................................129
Map screen information .......................... 273
Radio ...................................................126
Displaying information about the
icon where the cursor is set ............. 275
Displaying map information .................273
Standard map icons ............................ 276
Error messages ...................................135
Terms ..................................................133
Operation flow: Guiding the route .............26
Other settings............................................56
Overview buttons ......................................12
Map screen operation ............................. 267
Adjusting location in small
increments ....................................... 272
Current position display....................... 267
Map scale ............................................ 268
Orientation of the map......................... 268
Screen scroll operation........................ 271
Switching the map mode ..................... 269
Media operation ........................................ 99
Memory points ........................................ 308
Memory points settings ........................... 308
Deleting previous destinations ............ 317
Setting up address book...................... 312
P
Panoramic view monitor..........................184
Camera switch.....................................187
Display.................................................187
Driving precautions..............................184
How to switch the display ....................189
Panoramic view monitor precautions ......205
Area displayed on screen ....................205
Differences between the
screen and the actual road ..............210
The camera .........................................208
Setting up areas to avoid..................... 315
When approaching
three-dimensional objects ................212
Setting up home .................................. 309
Parking assist guide line display mode ...175
Setting up preset destinations ............. 310
Parking ................................................176
Mobile Assistant...................................... 149
Screen description...............................175
Mobile Assistant Operation ..................... 149
Peripheral monitoring system..................157
Phone......................................................219
N
Navigation operation ................................. 22
Phone operation (Hands-free
system for cellular phones)..................220
Navigation system................................... 263
352
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
Phone/message settings ........................ 240
Registering home...................................... 22
“Contact/Call History Settings”
screen.............................................. 242
Registering preset destinations................. 24
“Messaging Settings” screen............... 250
Registering/connecting
Bluetooth® device..................................43
“Phone Display Settings” screen......... 252
Profiles .................................................. 46
Phone/message settings screen ......... 240
Registering a Bluetooth® audio
player for the first time ....................... 44
“Sound Settings” screen...................... 241
Registering a Bluetooth® phone
for the first time ..................................43
Q
Quick guide............................................... 11
Quick reference .................. 20, 72, 220, 264
Map screen ......................................... 264
Navigation options screen................... 266
Route guidance....................................... 297
Route guidance screen ........................... 297
During freeway driving......................... 299
Route overview.................................... 298
Screen for route guidance ................... 297
Turn list screen.................................... 301
R
Radio operation ........................................ 80
Rear view monitor system ...................... 158
Driving precautions ............................. 158
Screen description .............................. 160
Rear view monitor system
precautions.......................................... 162
Turn-by-turn arrow screen................... 301
When approaching intersection...........300
S
Screen adjustment .................................... 40
Search operation..................................... 283
Area displayed on screen.................... 162
Searching by address.......................... 285
Differences between the
screen and the actual road .............. 164
Searching by address book................. 289
The camera ......................................... 163
Searching by emergency..................... 290
When approaching three-dimensional
objects ............................................. 165
Searching by intersection and
freeway ............................................ 290
Receiving on the Bluetooth® phone........ 231
Searching by map ............................... 292
Incoming calls ..................................... 231
Searching by point of interest.............. 286
Receiving traffic map information ........... 154
Displaying traffic map information ....... 154
Searching from previous
destinations...................................... 289
Receiving weather information ............... 152
Selecting search area.......................... 284
Displaying weather information ........... 152
Setting home as destination ................ 284
Searching by coordinates.................... 292
Setting preset destinations as
destination ....................................... 284
353
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Setting Bluetooth® details ......................... 48
“Bluetooth* Setup” screen ..................... 48
Connecting a Bluetooth® device ........... 51
Deleting a Bluetooth® device ................ 50
Editing the Bluetooth® device
information ......................................... 53
Registering a Bluetooth® device ........... 49
“System Settings” screen ...................... 54
Setting home as the destination................ 27
Setup............................... 124, 240, 318, 348
“Setup” screen .......................................... 20
Some basics ..................................... 74, 221
About the contacts in the
contact list........................................ 224
T
Talking on the Bluetooth® phone ............232
Incoming call waiting ...........................234
Things you should know..........167, 182, 215
If you notice any
symptoms.........................167, 182, 215
Product license ....................................217
Tips for operating the audio system ........126
Tips for the navigation system ................329
Touch screen gestures..............................34
Touch screen operation ............................35
Toyota parking assist monitor .................168
Driving precautions..............................168
Disc slot................................................. 76
Screen display .....................................170
Registering/connecting a
Bluetooth® phone ............................ 221
Using the system .................................171
Selecting an audio source ..................... 75
Toyota parking assist monitor
precautions ..........................................177
Sound settings....................................... 77
Area displayed on screen ....................177
Turning the system on and off............... 75
Differences between the
screen and the actual road ..............179
USB/AUX port ....................................... 77
Using the phone switch/
microphone ...................................... 222
Voice command system ................ 79, 223
When selling or disposing of the
vehicle.............................................. 224
Starting route guidance........................... 293
Pausing guidance................................ 296
Starting route guidance ....................... 293
Steering switches.................................... 121
The camera .........................................178
When approaching
three-dimensional objects ................180
Traffic information ...................................277
Displaying traffic information
on the map .......................................279
Traffic settings.........................................322
Auto avoid traffic..................................323
My traffic routes ...................................324
Screen for traffic settings.....................322
Troubleshooting ......................................253
Typical voice guidance prompts..............302
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
354
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
U
USB memory .......................................... 103
Overview ............................................. 103
Playing a USB audio ........................... 107
Useful information................................... 152
V
Voice command system.................. 137, 138
Using the voice command system ...... 138
Voice command system operation ...... 139
Voice command system operation.......... 138
Voice settings ........................................... 63
Voice settings screen ............................ 63
W
What to do if............................................ 253
X
XM Satellite Radio .................................... 91
Displaying the radio ID .......................... 95
How to subscribe to an
XM Satellite Radio ............................. 93
If the satellite radio tuner
malfunctions ...................................... 97
Overview ............................................... 91
Presetting a channel ............................. 95
Selecting a channel from the list ........... 96
355
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
Map database information and updates
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
END-USER TERMS
The content provided by HERE (“Data”) is licensed, not sold. By opening this package, or installing, copying, or
otherwise using the Data, you agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.
The Data is provided for your personal, internal use only and may not be resold. It is protected by copyright, and
is subject to the following terms (this “End User License Agreement”) and conditions which are agreed to by you,
on the one hand, and HERE and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. For
purposes of these terms, “HERE” shall mean (a) HERE North America, LLC with respect to Data for the Americas
and/or the Asia Pacific region and (b) HERE Europe B.V. for Data for Europe, the Middle East and/or Africa.
The Data includes certain information and related content provided under license to HERE from third parties and
is subject to the applicable supplier terms and copyright notices set forth at the following URL:
http://corporate.navteq.com/supplier_terms.html.
This data includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including © Her Majesty,
© Queen’s Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post, GeoBase®, © Department of Natural Resources Canada. All rights
reserved.
The Data may include or reflect data of licensors, including Her Majesty the Queen in the Right of Canada (“Her
Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation (“Canada Post”) and the Department of Natural Resources Canada
(“NRCan”). Such data is licensed on an “as is” basis. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and
NRCan, make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose.
The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable in respect of any claim, demand
or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result from the use or possession of the data or the Data. The licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable in any way for loss of revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind resulting from any defect in the data or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save harmless the licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, and
their officers, employees and agents from and against any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or action, alleging loss, costs, expenses, damages or injuries (including injuries
resulting in death) arising out of the use or possession of the data or the Data.
Contains information licensed under the Open Government License - Ontario.
Contains information licensed under the Open Government or Open Data Licenses of Newfoundland and
Labrador, Ontario, Niagara Region, Toronto, Edmonton and Alberta, British Colombia, Vancouver, Hamilton and
Peel.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the United States Postal Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.
©United States Postal Service® 2015. Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United States
Postal Service®. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal
Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.
Includes data available from the U.S. Geological Survey.
356
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
License Limitations on Use: You agree that your license to use this Data is limited to and conditioned on use for
solely personal, noncommercial purposes, and not for service bureau, timesharing or other similar purposes.
Except as otherwise set forth herein, you agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble
or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws.
License Limitations on Transfer: Your limited license does not allow transfer or resale of the Data, except on
the condition that you may transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis if: (a) you
retain no copies of the Data; (b) the recipient agrees to the terms of this End-User License Agreement; and (c)
you transfer the Data in the exact same form as you purchased it by physically transferring the original media
(e.g., the CD-ROM or DVD you purchased), all original packaging, all Manuals and other documentation.
Specifically, Multi-disc sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you and not as a
subset thereof.
Additional License Limitations: Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by HERE in a
separate written agreement, and without limiting the preceding paragraph, your license is conditioned on use of
the Data as prescribed in this agreement, and you may not (a) use this Data with any products, systems, or
applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of vehicle navigation,
positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with, or in
communication with, including without limitation, cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and
personal digital assistants or PDAs.
Warning: This Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time, changing
circum-stances, sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic Data, any of which may lead
to incorrect results.
No Warranty: This Data is provided to you “as is”, and you agree to use it at your own risk. HERE and its licensors
(and their licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any kind, express or
implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this Data,
or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: HERE AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS)
DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories and Countries
do not allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: HERE AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS)
SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF
THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THIS DATA;
OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF
HERE OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent the above
may not apply to you.
357
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
Export Control: You agree not to export from anywhere any part of the Data or any direct product thereof except
in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets
Control of the U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such export laws, rules or regulations prohibit HERE from complying with any
of its obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be excused and shall not constitute a
breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement: These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between HERE (and its licensors,
including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter.
Severability: You and HERE agree that if any portion of this agreement is found illegal or unenforceable, that
portion shall be severed and the remainder of the Agreement shall be given full force and effect.
Governing Law: The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois (for Data
for the Americas and/or the Asia Pacific region) or The Netherlands (for Data for Europe, the Middle East and
Africa), without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. For any and all disputes, claims and actions arising
from or in connection with the Data (“Claims”), you agree to submit to the personal jurisdiction of (a) the State of
Illinois for Claims related to Data for the Americas and/or the Asia Pacific region provided to you hereunder, and
(b) The Netherlands for Data for Europe, the Middle East and/or Africa provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users: If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any
other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government, this
Data is a “commercial item” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with this
End-User License Agreement, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the following “Notice of Use”, and be treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) NAME:
HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) ADDRESS:
425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL 60606.
This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to the End-User License
Agreement under which this Data was provided.
© 1987-2015 HERE. All rights reserved. *original publication date
If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided
herein, the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify HERE prior to
seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data.
© 1987-2015 HERE. All rights reserved. *original publication date
358
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
359
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
Certain business data provided by Infogroup © 2015, All Rights Reserved.
360
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
Certification
 Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, “Powered by Gracenote”, MusicID, Playlist
Plus and MediaVOCS are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc.
in the United States and/or other countries
361
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
362
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
For U.S. owners
363
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
U.S.A. (Entune Audio Plus)
 FCC ID: BABFT0045B
 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
 FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
 CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines. This
equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more
away from person’s body in normal use position.
 Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Canada (Entune Audio Plus)
 IC: 2024B-FT0045B
 This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1)
l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en
compromettre le fonctionnement.
 CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more
away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
ATTENTION: l’exposition aux rayonnements radiofréquence
- Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées
pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d’exposition aux fréquences
radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en
gardant une distance de 20cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à
l’exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
364
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
Mexico (Entune Audio Plus)
 RCPFUFT13-1083
 La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible
que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o
dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
365
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
U.S.A. (Entune Premium Audio)
 FCC ID: BABFT0044E
 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
 FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
 CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines. This
equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more
away from person’s body in normal use position.
 Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Canada (Entune Premium Audio)
 IC: 2024B-FT0044E
 This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1)
l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en
compromettre le fonctionnement.
 CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more
away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
ATTENTION: l’exposition aux rayonnements radiofréquence
- Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées
pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d’exposition aux fréquences
radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en
gardant une distance de 20cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à
l’exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
Mexico (Entune Premium Audio)
 La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible
que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o
dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
366
RAV4_RAV4 HV_Navi+MM_OM42B14U_(U)
16.06.08
20:05
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement